LV 10 2004 en 08

SIMIREL Time, Monitoring
and Coupling Relays and

Converters
8/2 Introduction Coupling relays and converters
Time relays Coupling relays with narrow type of

8/5 General data construction
8/17 Time relays in 22.5 mm industrial 8/68 General data
casing 8/71 Relay connectors
8/21 45 mm SIRIUS Design time relays 8/77 Plug-in relay connectors
8/23 Time relays for front panel mounting 8/79 Semiconductor couplers
8/24 Time relays for mounting onto contac-
tors Coupling relays in industrial enclosure
8/85 Relay connectors
Monitoring relays
Plug-in relays
Temperature monitoring relays 8/87 Relay connectors
8/26 General data
8/30 Analog adjustable relays Power relays
8/33 Digitally adjustable relays to 8/95 With screw and tab connectors
DIN 3440 Converters/isolation amplifiers
8/36 Digitally adjustable relays for up to 8/100 Interface converters/isolation amplifiers
3 sensors
8/105 Project planning aids
Thermistor motor protection
8/39 For PTC sensors
Monitoring relays for electrical

variables
8/46 General data
Phases and voltage:
8/49 - Phase failure and
phase sequence monitoring
8/50 - Phase asymmetry monitoring
8/51 - Line monitoring
8/52 - Single-phase voltage monitoring
8/55 - Three-phase voltage monitoring
8/56 Current:
- Single-phase current monitoring
8/58 Power factor:
- Monitoring (motor load monitoring)
Insulation resistance:
8/59 - For ungrounded
AC voltage networks
8/61 - For ungrounded DC voltage networks
Other monitoring relays

8/63 General data
8/64 Fill level
8/66 Speed
Siemens LV 10 · 2004
Time, Monitoring and Coupling Relays and SIMIREL Converters
Introduction
■ Overview
The advantages at a glance
3RP 7PV 3RS10 3RN 3UG

Order No. Page
Time relays
in 22.5 mm industrial enclosure • Low-cost favorites with monofunctions such as response 3RP15 8/18
delay, returning time, clock-pulse, star-delta function,
multifunction
• Wide-range voltage designs
in 45 mm SIRIUS design • The solution for small mounting depths 3RP20 8/22
• The low mounting height reduces the tier spacing
for front panel mounting • Analog and digital variants 7PV 8/23
for mounting onto contactors • Saves space because the relay is mounted onto the 3RT19 8/24
contactor
• Wiring advantages thanks to direct contacting with contactor
Temperature monitoring relays
for monitoring the temperatures of solids, liquids, and gases
Analog • Separate versions for overshoot and undershoot 3RS10, 8/32
8 • For simple monitoring tasks
• For PT100 or thermoelements J and K
3RS11
• Variable hysteresis
Digital, to DIN 3440 • For two-step or three-step controls 3RS10, 8/35
• For monitoring heat generation plants 3RS11
• For PT100/1000, KTY83/84, NTC or type
J, K, T, E, N, R, S, and B thermoelements
Digital, for up to 3 sensors • For simultaneously monitoring several sensors 3RS10 8/38
• Especially suited for monitoring motor winding temperatures
• For PT100/1000, KTY83/84, NTC
Thermistor motor protection
for PTC thermistor detectors • Relays for monitoring motor winding temperatures with type 3RN1 8/44
A PTC sensors
• Integrated with ATEX license
• Closed-circuit principle
• Depending on the version: with open-circuit and short-circuit
detection, protection against voltage failure, manual/auto-
matic/remote RESET 1 CO, 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 CO, 1 NO
+ 1 CO or 2 CO, hard gold-plated
Monitoring relay for electrical variables
Line monitoring, especially for portable machines such as construction machines
Phase failure and phase sequence monitoring • Low-cost solution to prevent incorrect directions of rotation 3UG35 11 8/49
as well as overheating of the motor due to phase failure
Phase failure and phase sequence monitoring and • Low-cost solution to prevent incorrect directions of rotation 3UG35 13 8/49
detection of regenerative reverse voltages up to as well as overheating of the motor due to phase failure
90 %
Phase failure, phase sequence, and phase asym- • Monitoring of the direction of rotation as well as overheating 3UG30 12 8/50
metry monitoring of the motor due to asymmetrical voltages or phase failure
Phase failure, phase sequence, phase asymmetry • Monitoring of the direction of rotation as well as overheating 3UG30 13 8/51
monitoring, and symmetrical undervoltage of the motor due to asymmetrical voltages or phase failure
• Trips on mains overload
Line monitoring for permanently installed machines and plants
Three-phase voltage monitoring with phase failure • Units with internal power supply without separate auxiliary 3UG30 41, 8/55
and asymmetry monitoring as well as symmetrical voltage 3UG30 42
overvoltage and undervoltage (3UG30 42 with neu- • Upper and lower threshold value for protecting the plant
tral conductor monitoring) against unstable networks; can be adjusted separately
Single-phase voltage monitoring
Voltage monitoring (threshold switch) with auxil- • Electrically isolated 3UG35 31, 8/54
iary voltage, switchable for overvoltage and under- • With or without memory 3UG35 32
voltage • Large measuring range with 3 steps
Voltage monitoring with internal power supply, • Own auxiliary voltage not required 3UG35 34, 8/54
version for overshoot and undershoot monitoring • Low wiring overhead 3UG35 35
(3UG35 34) or window monitoring (3UG35 35) • Variable hysteresis
• With or without memory (3UG35 34)
8/2 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Introduction
The advantages at a glance
3TX 3RS18 LZX 3TG10 3RS17

Order No. Page
Monitoring relays for electrical variables
Single-phase current monitoring
Current monitoring with auxiliary voltage, switch- • Electrically isolated 3UG35 21, 8/57
able for overcurrent or undercurrent • With or without memory 3UG35 22
• Large measuring range with 3 steps
Power factor monitoring (motor load monitoring)
Monitoring relay for overshoot and undershoot • Upper and lower threshold value can be adjusted separately 3UG30 14 8/58
monitoring with internal power supply (window
monitoring)
Insulation resistance
Monitoring of the insulation resistance for • Test button 3UG30 81, 8/60, 8/62
ungrounded AC or DC networks from 10 ... 110 kΩ • With or without memory 3UG30 82
• Switchable measuring range
Other monitoring relays
Fill level and resistance • As single-step or two-step controls for inlet or outlet monitor- 3UG35 01 8/64
8
ing of conducting liquids or as resistance threshold switch
• Variable, wide range from 5 ... 100 kΩ
• UNDER/OVER adjustable
Underspeed monitoring • Together with a sensor for monitoring continuous pulses 3UG30 51 8/67
• With or without memory
• Adjustable ON delay
Interfaces with narrow type of construction
Relay connector • Width 6.2 mm (1 NO, 1 CO), 12.5 mm and 17.5 mm 3TX7 002, 8/74, 8/75
• Output interfaces 3TX7 003,
• Input interfaces with hard gold-plating 3TX7 004,
3TX7 005
Plug-in interface, complete with relay • Width 6.2 mm (1 NO, 1 CO) 3TX7 014-1..00 8/78
• Replaceable relay
Plug-in interface, complete with relay and hard • Width 6.2 mm (1 CO) 3TX7 014-1..02 8/78
gold-plating
Semiconductor interfaces • Output 1 semiconductor, triac or transistor 3TX7 002, 8/83
3TX7 004,
3TX7 005
Coupling relays in industrial casing
Relay connector • Safe isolation up to 300 V between contacts and relay 3RS18 8/86
circuits
• 1, 2 and 3 changeover contacts
• Hard gold-plated contacts in combination and wide voltage
range versions
Plug-in relays
Relay connector with 1 or 2 changeover contacts • Switching capacity 16 A/8 A for LZX:RT; 6 A for LZX:RY LZX:RT, 8/90
• Width 15.5 mm LZX:RY
• Socket alternatively with/without logic isolation
Relay connector with 2, 3, and 4 changeover con- • Switching capacity 12 A/10 A/6 A LZX:PT 8/90
tacts • Width 27 mm
• Socket alternatively with/without logic isolation
Relay connector with 3 changeover contacts and • Switching capacity 6 A LZX:MT 8/92
circular base • 11-pole circular base
• Width 38 mm
Power relays
With screw and tab connectors 3TG10 8/98
Converter/isolation amplifiers
Converters for standard signals and non-standard • All terminals are protected against polarity reversing and 3RS17 8/102
variables overvoltage up to 30 V
• For electrical isolation and conversion of analog signals
• Short-circuit resistant outputs
• From 6.2 mm width
• Switchable multi-range converters
• Variants with manual/automatic switch for setpoint input or
for the conversion of analog variables into frequency
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/3

Introduction
■ Overview Locking/unlocking the removable terminal
SIMIREL offers everything one needs between the motor feeder

and automation systems. Regardless whether time, monitoring
or coupling relays or converters.
Advantages
• Comprehensive range – suitable for all situations
• Very simple operation
• Multifunctional – the relays are very versatile
• Practical graduated range of products – tailor-made solutions
• Many versions also with spring-loaded terminals.
NSA0_00364
NSA0_00365
■ Design
Removable terminals Unlocking, step 1: release latch with Unlocking, step 2: pull terminal to the
screwdriver front
The removable terminal is the innovative connection method by
Siemens for the new relay casing with 22.5 mm and 45 mm
width. This allows the complete terminal block to be quickly and
easily assembled and disassembled. CLICK
The connections do not have to be detached for this purpose.
Note:
• The following devices will be converted by end 2004 and can
NSA0_00366a
be ordered using the same order number:

- 3RP15 time relay in 22.5 mm industrial casing
- 3RS10/3RS11 temperature monitoring relay
8 - 3RN10 thermistor motor protection
- Coupling relay in 3RS18 industrial casing
• Before the terminal blocks are removed, the unit must be de-
NSA0_00367a
energized.
Features
Unlocking, step 3: lift terminal Locking: push terminal to the back
until it latches
Removeable
terminal blocks
Customer benefits
• Quick replacement of the basic unit minimizes maintenance
costs and reduces downtimes
• The coding of the terminals prevents mistakes during replace-
ment.
Contact
• Configuration without unit possible
• Finger-safe during replacement
NSA0_00363
• Easy screw-type and spring-loaded connection
• Proven terminal technology

The new type of construction of the removable terminal means
that the conductors remain easy to connect.
The old conductor cross-sections can still be used.
■ Accessories
• Different connection methods Designation DT Order No. PS* Weight
All modules are available with screw-type and spring-loaded per PU
connections. approx.
kg
• Coding
The coding ensures that the terminal blocks cannot be mixed Blank unit designation plates
for 3RP, 3RN1, 3RS10, 3RS11,
up (EN 50178). 3RS18
• Withdrawal and vibration safety 20 mm × 7 mm A 3RT19 00-1SB20 340 units 0.067
The terminal blocks are latched to the casing. The terminal pastel turquoise
blocks can be detached with the help of a DIN VDE 0100-410 Computer labeling system for individual labels available from:
screwdriver. The terminal blocks cannot be detached uninten- murrplastic Systemtechnik GmbH.
tionally.
• Finger-safe
The contacts are finger-safe to DIN 61140, IEC 60529 even if
the unit is removed.
• Labeling
All terminal connections are printed onto the terminal block
which allows the unit to be factory-fitted.
8/4 Siemens LV 10 · 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.

Time Relays
General data
■ Technical specifications
Type 3RP20 05 3RP15 05 3RP15 11 3RP15 40 3RP15 60 3RP15 74 3RP15 27
3RP20 25 3RP15 31 3RP15 12 3RP15 76
3RP15 32 3RP15 13
3RP15 33 3RP15 25
3RP15 55
Rated insulation voltage AC V 300; 500 for 3RP15 05-1BT20
Pollution degree 3,
Overvoltage category III
Working range at excitation1) 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us at AC; 0.8 ... 1.25 × Us for DC;
0.95 ... 1.05 x rated frequency
Rated power W 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz VA 4 6 6 22) 6 6 1
Rated operating currents Ie
AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz A 33) –
AC-14; DC-13 A – 0.01 ... 0.6
DC-13 at 24 V A 1 –
DC-13 at 48 V A 0.45 –
DC-13 at 60 V A 0.35 –
DC-13 at 110 V A 0.2 –
DC-13 at 230 V A 0.1 –
Required DIAZED fuse 4) A 4 –
Operational class gL/gG
Operating frequency
• when loaded with Ie 230 V AC 1/h 2500 5000
• when loaded with 3RT10 16 contactor, AC 230 V 1/h 5000 5000
Recovery time ms 1505) 300 150 50
Minimum ON period ms 35 356) – 2007) –
Residual current mA – ≤5
with non-conducting output
Voltage drop VA – ≤ 3.5
8
with conducting output
Short-time loading capacity – 10 (to 10 ms)
Setting accuracy typical ± 5%
with reference to scale value
Repeat accuracy ≤±1%
Mechanical endurance operating cycles 30 × 106 100 × 106
Permissible ambient temperature during operation °C – 25 ... + 60
during storage °C – 40 ... + 85
Degree of protection Cover IP40
acc. to EN 60529 Terminals IP20
Conductor cross-sections
- Screw connection solid mm² 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5) 1 × (0.5 ... 4)
(to connect 1 or 2 conductors); 2 × (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
for standard screwdriver finely stranded with mm² 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5) 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
(size 2 and Pozidriv 2) end sleeve 2 × (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)
AWG conductors, AWG 2 × (18 ... 14) 2 × (20 ... 14)
solid or stranded
terminal screw M3 M 3.5
tightening torque NM 0.8 ... 1.2
- Spring-loaded terminal solid mm² 2 × (0.25 ... 2.5) 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
(to connect 1 or 2 conductors; for finely stranded
22.5 mm time relay use screwdriv- • with end sleeve mm² 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5) 2 × (0.25 ... 1)
er with 3 mm blade or 8WA2 807 • without end sleeve mm² 2 × (0.25 ... 2.5) 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
opening tool)8) AWG conductors, AWG 2 × (24 ... 14) 2 × (24 ... 16)
solid or stranded
1) If nothing else is stated.
2) Maximum inrush current 1 A/100 ms.
3) For 3RP15 05-.R: NC contact -> Ie = 1 A.
4) Ik ≥ 1 kA, weld-free acc. to IEC 60947-5-1.
5) With 3RP15 05-.BW30/.AW30/.RW30 and 3RP15 25-.BW30, 10 to 250 ms,
voltage-dependent.
6) Minimum ON period with 3RP15 05-.BW30, 150 ms, until instantaneous
contact has switched.
7) For correct operation, observe minimum ON period.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/5

Time Relays
General data
Type 3RP20 05 3RP15 05 3RP15 11 3RP15 40 3RP15 60 3RP15 74 3RP15 27

3RP20 25 3RP15 31 3RP15 12 3RP15 76
3RP15 32 3RP15 13
3RP15 33 3RP15 25
3RP15 55
Permissible mounting position any
Shock resistance g/ms 15/11
Half-sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 10 ... 55/0.35
EMC tests acc. to basic specification EN 61000-6-2/EN 61000-6-4
Type 7PV33 48 7PV41 48 7PV43 48

Rated insulation voltage AC V 250
Overvoltage category C to DIN VDE 0110
Working range of excitation + 10 ... – 15 % 24 V: – 15 ... + 30 %
115/230 V: – 15 ... + 10 %
Rated power W 1
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz VA 11
Rated operating currents Ie A 8
AC-1 at AC 230 V, 50 Hz
Operating frequency
• when loaded with Ie AC 230 V 1/h 600
• when loaded with 3RT16 contactor, AC 230 V 1/h –
Recovery time ms 50 100
Minimum ON period ms 50 100
Setting accuracy ± 0.03 % ± 10 %
with reference to upper limit of scale ± 10 ms –
8 Repeat accuracy ± 0.03 %
± 10 ms
±2%

Permissible ambient tem- during operation °C – 10 ... + 60 – 20 ... + 60
perature during storage °C – 30 ... + 70 – 25 ... + 70
Degree of protection IP65 IP50
acc. to EN 60529
8/6 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Time Relays
General data
acc. to IEC 61812-1/DIN VDE 0435 Part 2021
Type 3RT19 16-2C 3RT19 16-2E 3RT19 16-2L
3RT19 16-2D 3RT19 16-2F
3RT19 26-2C 3RT19 16-2G
3RT19 26-2D 3RT19 26-2E
3RT19 26-2F
3RT19 26-2G
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III to DIN VDE 0110
Working range of excitation 0.8 ... 1.1 × Us, 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us,
0.95 ... 1.05 x rated frequency 0.95 ... 1.05 x rated frequency
Rated power W 1 4 (1 W for 3RT1916-2L)
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz VA 1 4
AC-140; DC-13 A 0.3 for 3RT19 16 –
0.5 for 3RT19 26
AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz A – 3
DC-13 at 24 V A – 1
DC-13 at 110 V A – 0.2
DC-13 at 230 V A – 0.1
Required DIAZED fuse A – 4
Operating frequency
• when loaded with Ie 230 V AC 1/h 2500 2500
• when loaded with 3RT1016 contactor, AC 230 V 1/h 2500 5000
Recovery time ms 50 150
Minimum ON period ms 35 200 ( with OFF-delay 35 (with OFF-delay
without auxiliary volt- with auxiliary volt-
age) age)
Residual current
(two-wire)
mA ≤ 5 –
8
Voltage drop VA ≤ 3.5 –
with conducting output
Short-time loading capacity A 10 (to 10 ms) –
Setting accuracy ≤ ± 15 %
with reference to upper limit of scale
Repeat accuracy ≤ ± 1%
Permissible ambient temperature during operation °C – 25 ... + 60
Degree of protection Cover IP40
acc. to EN 60529 Terminals IP20
Conductor connection solid mm² 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5),
2 × (0.75 ... 4)
finely stranded with end mm² 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
sleeve
solid or stranded AWG 2 × (18 ... 14)
Terminal screw M3
Tightening torque NM 0.8 ... 1.2
Vibration resistance Hz/ 10 ... 55/0.35
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 mm
EMC tests IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4
acc. to basic specification
Overvoltage protection Varistor integrated into time relay integrated into 3RT1916
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/7

Time Relays
General data
■ Functions
3RP15/3RP20/7PV function table
Function Function chart 3RP20 time relay 3RP15 time relay and 7PV time
and 3RP19 01 3RP19 01 label set relay
label set
3RP19 01-0A
Time relay energized
Identification
3RP20 05-.A
3RP15 05-.A
3RP20 25
3RP15 25
3RP15 27
3RP15 40
3RP15 55
Contact closed
3RP15 1.
3RP15 3.
3RP15 7.
7PV33
7PV43
Contact open
letter
1 changeover contact
with ON-delay A1/A2 7 7 7 A 7 7 7 7
15/18 NSB00858
15/16
t
OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage A1/A2 7 7 B1) 7 73) 73)
> 35 ms
B1/A2
NSB00859
15/18
15/16
t
OFF-delay without auxiliary volt- > 200 ms 7
age A1/A2
NSB00860
15/18
15/16
t
ON-delay and OFF-delay with 7 7 C1)
8
A1/A2
auxiliary voltage
B1/A2
(t = ton = toff)
NSB00861
15/18
15/16
t t
flashing, starting with interval A1/A2 7 7 D 72)
NSB00862
(pulse/interval 1:1)
15/18
15/16
t t
clock-pulse, starting with interval A1/A2 7
NSB00863
(dead interval, pulse time, and 15/18

time setting ranges each sepa- 15/16
rately adjustable)
Interval Pulse period
passing make contact A1/A2 7 7 E 74) 74)
NSB00864
15/18
15/16
t
passing break contact with auxil- A1/A2 7 7 F1)
iary voltage > 35 ms
B1/A2
NSB00865
15/18
15/16
t
pulse shaping with auxiliary volt- A1/A2 7 7 G1) 75) 75)
age (pulse generation at the out- >35 ms
put does not depend on duration B1/A2
NSB00867
of energizing)
15/18
15/16
t
additive ON-delay with auxiliary A1/A2 7 7 H1)
voltage t1
t2
t3
B1/A2
NSB00868
15/18
15/16
t
1 normally open contact (semiconductor)
ON-delay 7
NSB00869a
The two-wire time relay is con- A1/A2

nected in series with the load.
Timing begins after application of t
the exciting voltage.
The semiconductor output then
becomes conducting, and the
load is energized.
1) Note on function with start contact: a new control signal at terminal B after 3) This function is indicated on the unit with the identification letter "C".
the operating time has started resets the operating time to zero. This does 4) This function is indicated on the unit with the identification letter "H".
not apply to "G", "G!" and "H", "H!", which are not retriggerable.
5) This function is indicated on the unit with the identification letter "B".
2) For the flashing function, the start between interval "D" and pulse "Di" is
selectable.
8/8 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Time Relays
General data
Function Function chart 3RP20 time 3RP15 time relay and 7PV
relay and 3RP19 01 label set
3RP19 01 label
set
3RP19 01-0B
3RP19 01-0A
Identification
3RP20 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.R
3RP20 25
3RP15 25
3RP15 27
3RP15 40
3RP15 55
3RP15 60
Contact closed
3RP15 1.
3RP15 3.
3RP15 7.
7PV41
Contact open
letter
2 changeover contacts
with ON-delay A1/A2 7 7 7 A 7 7
15/18
15/16
NSB00871
25/28
25/26
t
ON-delay and instantaneous 7 7 A! 7
NSB00872
A1/A2
contact
15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage A1/A2 7 7 7 B1)

> 35 ms
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
NSB00873
25/28
25/26
t
OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage A1/A2 7 7 B!1)
NSB00874
and instantaneous contact > 35ms

B1/A2
15/18
8
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
OFF-delay without auxiliary volt- > 200 ms 7

age A1/A2
15/18
15/16
NSB00875
25/28
25/26
t
ON-delay and OFF-delay with aux- 7 7 7 C1)
NSB00876
A1/A2
iliary voltage (t = ton = toff) B1/A2
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t t
ON-delay and OFF-delay with aux- 7 7 C!1)

NSB00877
A1/A2
iliary voltage and instantaneous B1/A2
contact (t = ton = toff)
15/18
15/16
t t
21/24
21/22
flashing, starting with interval 7 7 7 D

NSB00878
A1/A2
(pulse/interval) 15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t t
flashing, starting with interval A1/A2 7 7 D!

NSB00879
(pulse/interval 1:1) 15/18

and instantaneous contact 15/16
t t
21/24
21/22
passing make contact A1/A2 7 7 7 E

NSB00880
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t
passing make contact and instan- 7 7 E!

NSB00881
A1/A2
taneous contact 15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
1) Note on function with start contact: a new control signal at terminal B after
the operating time has started resets the operating time to zero. This does
not apply to G, G! and H, H!, which are not retriggerable.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/9

Time Relays
General data
Function Function chart 3RP20 time 3RP15 time relay and

relay and 3RP19 01 label set
3RP19 01 label
set
3RP19 01-0B
3RP19 01-0A
Identification
3RP20 05-.B
3RP15 05-.B
3RP15 05-.R
3RP20 25
3RP15 25
3RP15 27
3RP15 40
3RP15 55
3RP15 60
Contact closed
3RP15 1.
3RP15 3.
3RP15 7.
Contact open
letter
2 changeover contacts
passing break contact with auxil- A1/A2 7 7 7 F1)
NSB00882
iary voltage 35ms
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t
passing break contact with auxil- A1/A2 7 7 F!1)
NSB00883
iary voltage and instantaneous > 35ms

contact B1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
pulse shaping with auxiliary volt- A1/A2 7 7 7 G1)

NSB00884
age (pulse generation at the output 35ms

does not depend on duration of B1/A2
energizing) 15/18
8 15/16
25/28
25/26
t
pulse shaping with auxiliary volt- 7 7 G!1)
NSB00885
A1/A2
age and instantaneous contact >35ms
(pulse generation at the output B1/A2
does not depend on duration of
15/18
energizing) 15/16
t
21/24
21/22
additive ON-delay with auxiliary A1/A2 7 H1)

voltage t1 t2
t3
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
NSB00886
25/28
25/26
t
additive ON-delay with auxiliary A ./A 2 7 7 H!1)
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 8 1 a
voltage and instantaneous contact t 1 t

t 3
2
B ./A 2
1 5 /1 8
1 5 /1 6
t
2 1 /2 4
2 1 /2 2
star-delta function A1/A2 7 7 *∆

NSB00888
17/18
27/28
t 50ms
2 normally open contacts
star-delta function *∆ A1/A2 7
NSB00889
17/18
17/28
t 50 ms
3 normally open contacts
star-delta function with overtravel A1/A2 7
function2)
(idling) B1/A2
17/18
50ms
NSB00890
17/28
17/16
t t
Idling
1) Note on function with start contact: a new control signal at terminal B after 2) For function diagrams showing the various possibilities of operation of the
the operating time has started resets the operating time to zero. This does 3RP15 60-1S.30 (see Page 8/11).
not apply to G, G! and H, H!, which are not retriggerable.
8/10 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Time Relays
General data
3RP15 function table
Possibilities of operation of the 3RP15 60-1S.30 time relay
Time relay energized tY = star time 1 to 20 s

Contact closed tIdling = idling time (overtravel time) 30 to 600 s
Contact open
Operation 1 Operation 1:
A./A2 Start contact B./A2 is opened when supply voltage A./A2 is applied.
The supply voltage is applied to A./A2 and there is no control signal on
B./A2. This starts the *∆timing. The idling time (overtravel time) is
B./A2 started by applying a control signal to B./A2.
When the set time tIdling (30 to 600 s) has elapsed, the output relays
(17/16 and 17/28) are reset. If the control signal on B./A2 is switched off
17/18
(minimum OFF period 270 ms), a new timing is started.
Y
Notes:
17/28 Observe response time (dead time) of 400 ms on energizing supply
voltage until contacts 17/18 and 17/16 close.
NSB00891
17/16
Operation 2:
tY 50 ms t Idling tY 50 ms t Idling
300 ms Start contact B./A2 is closed when supply voltage A./A2 is applied.
If the control signal B./A2 is already present when the supply voltage
A./A2 is applied, no timing is started. The timing is only started when the
Operation 2
control signal B./A2 is switched off.
A./A2
Operation 3:
B./A2 Start contact B./A2 closes while star time is running.
If the control signal B./A2 is applied again during the star time, the idling
17/18
Y
time starts and the timing is terminated normally.
8
17/28 Operation 4:
Start contact B./A2 opens while delta time is running and is applied
17/16 again.
NSB00892 If the control signal on B./A2 is applied and switched off again during
tY 50 ms t Idling
the delta time although the idling time has not yet elapsed, the idling
time (overtravel time) is reset to zero. If the control signal is re-applied to
B./A2, the idling time is restarted.
Operation 3
A./A2 Application example based on standard operation (operation 1)

For example, use of 3RP15 60 for compressor control
B./A2 Frequent starting of compressors strains the network, the machine, and
the increased costs for the operator. The new time relay prevents fre-
17/18 quent starting at times when there is high demand for compressed air. A
Y special control circuit prevents the compressor from being switched off
immediately when the required air pressure in the tank has been
reached. Instead, the valve in the intake tube is closed and the com-
17/28 pressor runs in idling mode for a specific time which can be set from 30
to 600 s.
17/16 If the pressure falls within this time, the motor does not have to be
NSB00893 restarted again, but can return to nominal load operation from no-load
tY 50 ms operation.
t Idling
If the pressure does not fall within this idling time, the motor is switched
off.
Operation 4 The pressure switch controls the timing via B./A2.
A./A2 The supply voltage is applied to A./A2 and the start contact B./A2 is
open, i.e. there is no control signal on B./A2 when the supply voltage is
applied. The pressure switch signals "too little pressure in system" and
B./A2 starts the timing via terminal B./A2. The compressor is started, enters
*∆ operation, and fills the pressure tank.
17/18 When the pressure switch signals "sufficient pressure", the control signal
Y B./A2 is applied, the idling time (overtravel time) is started, and the
compressor enters no-load operation for the set period of time between
30 to 600 s. The compressor is then switched off. The compressor is
17/28 only restarted if the pressure switch responds again (low pressure).
NSB00894
17/16
tY 50 ms < t Idling < t Idling t Idling
The following applies to all operations:

the pressure switch controls the timing via B./A2.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/11

Time Relays
General data
■ Circuit diagrams
Internal circuit diagrams (terminal designation to DIN 46199, Part 5)
3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A
3RP15 1 3RP15 3-.A 3RP20 05 3RP20 05
3RP15 25-.A 3RP20 05
3RP20 05
3RP20 25
AC/DC24V AC/DC24V AC/DC24V AC/DC24V
AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V

AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V
A1 A3 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 A1 A3 15
NSB00898
NSB00899
NSB00897
NSB00900
~
A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18
with ON-delay OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage ON-delay and OFF-delay with aux- flashing
iliary voltage
3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A

3RP20 05 3RP20 05 3RP20 00
AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V

AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V
A1 A3 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 A1 B1 A3 B3 15
NSB00904
NSB00902
NSB00903

NSB00901
8 A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18
passing make contact passing break contact with auxil- pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage additive ON-delay with auxiliary volt-
iary voltage age
3RP15 27 3RP15 40-.A 3RP15 55 3RP15 05-.AW30

U = AC/DC 24 ... 66 V
AC/DC24V
AC/DC 90 ... 240 V AC/DC42V...48V
AC/DC24V
AC/DC100/127V AC/DC60V
AC/DC 24-66V AC/DC200/240V AC100/127V AC/DC24...240V
AC/DC 90-240V AC200/240V
NSB00905
A1+ A1 15 A1 A3 15 A1 B1 15
NSB00908
NSB00906
NSB00907
A2 U
~
A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18
Last
ON-delay, two-wire design OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage clock-pulse relay multi-function relay
(same functions as 3RP15 05-1A)
3RP15 05-.B, 3RP15 25-1B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B
AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V

AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V
A1 A3 15 25 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 25 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 25 A1 A3 15 25
NSB00911
NSB00912
NSB00909
NSB00910
A2 16 18 26 28 A2 16 18 26 28 A2 16 18 26 28 A2 16 18 26 28
ON-delay, 3RP15 25-1B OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage ON-delay and OFF-delay with aux- flashing
also for AC/DC 42...48/60 V iliary voltage
(see Page 8/13 3RP15 25-1BR30)
3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B
AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V

AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V
A1 A3 15 25 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 25 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 25 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 21
NSB00915
NSB00914
NSB00916
NSB00913
A2 16 18 26 28 A2 16 18 26 28 A2 16 18 26 28 A2 16 18 22 24
passing make contact passing break contact with auxil- pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage additive ON-delay with auxiliary volt-
iary voltage age and instantaneous contact
8/12 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Time Relays
General data
3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B

AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V
AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V
A1 A3 15 21 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 21 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 21 A1 A3 15 21
NSB00919
NSB00918
NSB00917
NSB00920
~
A2 16 18 22 24 A2 16 18 22 24 A2 16 18 22 24 A2 16 18 22 24
ON-delay and instantaneous con- OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage ON-delay and OFF-delay with auxil- flashing and instantaneous con-
tact and instantaneous contact iary voltage and instantaneous contact
tact
3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B

AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V

AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V AC200/240V
A1 A3 15 21 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 21 A1 B1 A3 B3 15 21 A1 A3 17 27
NSB00924
NSB00922
NSB00923
NSB00921
A2 16 18 22 24 A2 16 18 22 24 A2 16 18 22 24 A2 Y18 d28
passing make contact and instan- passing break contact with auxil- pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage star-delta function
taneous contact iary voltage and instantaneous and instantaneous contact
contact
3RP15 74, 3RP15 76 3RP15 40-.B 3RP15 05-.BW30/-1BT20/-.RW30 3RP15 25-. BR30
AC100/127V
AC200/240V
AC/DC24V
A C /D C 2 4 V
A C /D C 1 0 0 /1 2 7 V
A C /D C 2 0 0 /2 4 0 V
AC/DC24...240V
AC400/440 V AC/DC60V
AC/DC42...48V
8
A 1
A1 A3 A 1 1 5 2 5 A1 B1 1. 2. A1 A3 15 25
N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 2 6 a
17
NSB00927
NSB00928
NSB00925
A2 Y18 d28 A 2 1 6 1 8 2 6 2 8 A2 16 18 2. 2. A2 16 18 26 28
A 2
star-delta time relay OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage multi-function relay (for functions with ON-delay
see function table)
3RP15 25-. BW30 3RP15 60-. S

AC/DC24V
AC100/127V
AC/DC24...240V AC200/240V
A1 15 25 A1 B1 A3 B3 17
NSB00929a
NSB00930a
A2 16 18 26 28 A2 Y18 28 16
with ON-delay star delta time relay with overtravel

function (idling)
7PV33 48-2AX34 7PV33 48-2AX34 7PV33 48-2AX34 7PV33 48-2AX34

AC/DC 24V 2 11 AC/DC 24V 2 11 AC/DC 24V 2 11 AC/DC 24V 2 11
2 11 2 11 2 11 2 11
AC110 - 240V AC110 - 240V AC110 - 240V AC110 - 240V
2 11 5 1 2 11 5 1 2 11 5 1 2 11 5 1
A1 B1 15 A1 B1 15 A1 B1 15 A1 B1 15
NSB01109a
NSB01110a
NSB01111a
NSB01112a
A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18 A2 16 18
10 4 3 10 4 3 10 4 3 10 4 3
ON-delay (A) OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage passing make contact (H) pulse-forming with auxiliary volt-
(C) age (B)
7PV33 48-2AX34 7PV33 48-2AX34

AC/DC 24V 2 11 AC/DC 24V 2 11
2 11 2 11
AC110 - 240V AC110 - 240V
2 11 5 1 2 11 5 1
A1 B1 15 A1 B1 15
NSB01113a
NSB01114a
~
A2 16 18 A2 16 18
. Important!
10 4 3 10 4 3
The terminal designations for 7PV are different from the desig-
flashing, starting with interval (D) flashing, starting with pulse (Di) nations for the 3RP1 terminals.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/13

Time Relays
General data
7PV41 48-1BG30 7PV41 48-1BG30 7PV43 48-1AG30 7PV43 48-1AG30

7PV41 48-1BP30 7PV41 48-1BP30 7PV43 48-1AP30 7PV43 48-1AP30
AC/DC 24V 10 7 AC/DC 24V 10 7 AC/DC 24V 10 11 AC/DC 24V 10 11
AC 110V 10 7 AC 110V 10 7 AC 110V AC 110V
AC 240V AC 240V 10 11 10 11
AC 240V AC 240V
2 1 11 2 1 11 2 5 1 2 5 1
A1 15 25 A1 15 21 A1 B1 15 A1 B1 15
NSB01115
NSB01116
NSB01118
NSB01117
A2 16 18 26 28 A2 16 18 22 24 A2 16 18 A2 16 18
10 7 4 3 8 9 10 7 4 3 8 9 10 11 4 3 10 11 4 3
ON-delay (0) ON-delay and instantaneous con- ON-delay (A) OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage
tact (1) (C)
7PV43 48-1AG30 7PV43 48-1AG30

7PV43 48-1AP30 7PV43 48-1AP30
AC/DC 24V 10 11 AC/DC 24V 10 11
AC 110V 10 11 AC 110V 10 11
AC 240V AC 240V
2 5 1 2 5 1
A1 B1 15 A1 B1 15
NSB01119
NSB01120
A2 16 18 A2 16 18
. Important!
10 11 4 3 10 11 4 3 The terminal designations for 7PV are different from
the designations for the 3RP1 terminals
passing make contact (H) pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage
(B)
8 Position of the connection terminals

3RP20 05-.A 3RP20 25-.A 3RP20 05-.BW30
1 5 A 3 A 1 1 5 A 3 A 1 15/17 21/25/ B1 A1
27
16 18 22/26 24/28 A2
1 6 1 8 A 2 1 6 1 8 A 2
N S B 0 0 1 1 9 6 a N S B 0 0 1 1 9 6 a NSB0_01392
3RP15 05-1A 3RP15 05-1AW 3RP15 05-1B. 3RP15 05-1BT 3RP15 05-1BW 3RP15 05-1RW
1 5 / 1 5 /
A 1 B 1 1 5 A 1 B 1 1 5 A 1 B 1 1 5 /
1 7 A 1 B 1 1 7 A 1 B 1 1 7 A 1 B 1 1 5
2 1 / 2 1 / 2 1 /
A 3 B 3 A 3 B 3 2 5 /
2 7
2 5 /
2 7
2 5 /
2 7
2 5
fo r 1 fo r 1 fo r 2 fo r 2 fo r 2 fo r 2
c h a n g e o v e r c h a n g e o v e r c h a n g e o v e r c h a n g e o v e r c h a n g e o v e r c h a n g e o v e r
c o n ta c t c o n ta c t c o n ta c ts c o n ta c ts c o n ta c ts
c o n ta c ts
2 2 / 2 4 / 2 2 / 2 4 / 2 2 / 2 4 /
2 6 2 8 2 6 2 8 2 6 2 8 2 6 2 8
1 6 1 8 A 2 1 6 1 8 A 2 1 6 1 8 A 2 1 6 1 8 A 2 1 6 1 8 A 2 1 6 1 8 A 2
N S B 0 0 9 9 6 N S B 0 1 0 0 7 N S B 0 1 0 0 8 N S B 0 0 9 9 9 N S B 0 0 9 9 9 N S B 0 1 0 0 0
.
8/14 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Time Relays
General data
Position of the connection terminals
3RP15 1 3RP15 25-1A. or -1B. 1) 3RP15 27 3RP15 3. 3RP15 40
A 1 1 5 A 1 B 1 1 5 A 1 1 5
A 1 A 3 1 5 A 1 A 3 1 5 A 3 2 5 A 1 A 3 B 3 A 1 1 5 A 1 2 5
fo r 1 fo r 2 fo r fo r 1 fo r 2
fo r 1 fo r 1
c h a n g e o v e r c h a n g e o v e r 1 N O c h a n g e o v e r c h a n g e o v e r
c h a n g e o v e r c h a n g e o v e r
c o n ta c t c o n ta c ts c o n ta c t c o n ta c t c o n ta c ts
c o n ta c t c o n ta c t
1 6 1 8 A 2 1 6 1 8 A 2 2 6 2 8 A 2 1 6 1 8 A 2 2 6 2 8 A 2
N S B 0 1 0 0 1 N S B 0 1 0 0 2 N S B 0 1 0 0 3 N S B 0 _ 0 1 0 0 4 a
1 6 1 8 A 2 1 6 1 8 A 2 1 6 1 8 A 2
N S B 0 0 9 9 6
3RP15 55 3RP15 60 3RP15 7. LZX socket: MR78750 Socket 7PX9921

for time relays 7PV33; 7PV4. for time relays 7PV33; 7PV4.
A 1 B 1 1 7
A 1 A 3 1 5 A 3 B 3 A 1 A 3 1 7 9 8 7 5 3 4 4 5 6 7 8
fo r 1 fo r 1 fo r
c h a n g e o v e r N O c o n ta c t 1 N O
c o n ta c t c o n ta c t
1 6 1 8 A 2 1 6 1 8 2 8 A 2 10 11 6 1 2 3 2 1 11 10 9
N S B 0 1 0 0 1 N S B 0 1 0 0 6
1 8 2 8 A 2 NSB01121 NSB01122
Note: all the diagrams show the view onto the connection terminals.
N S B 0 1 0 0 5
8
3RP15/3RP20/7PV circuit diagrams
Control circuits (example circuits) Control circuit (example circuit)
with 3RP15 74 and 3RP15 76 star-delta time relays with 3RP15 60 star-delta time relays
for pushbutton operation for maintained-contact operation Legend:
Size S00 to S3 Size S00 to S3 S0 button "OFF"
S1 button "ON"
S maintained-contact button
L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC ...V) K1 line contactor
F0
K2 star contactor
F0 95 F0 95
F1 F1 K3 delta contactor
96 96 S1 K4 timer or time relay
F0 fuse
S0
F1 overload relay
P1 pressure switch
S1 S
44
44
K1 K1 11
43 17 17 17 P1
43 K4 K4 K4
17 17 18 28 16 14 12
33 13 33 13
K4 K1 K2 K4 K1 K2
34 14 34 14
18 28 18 28 22 22
K3 K2
42 22 42 22 21 21
K3 K2 K3 K2
41 21 41 21
K2 A1 K3 A1 K1 A1 A1 B1
K4 K2 K3 K1 K4 K2 K3 K1
A2 A2 A2 A2
N(L ) NSB00950a N(L ) NSB00951a
N(L )
NSB01126
The 17/18 contact is only closed on the star level;

it is open on the delta level as well as when the power is switched off.
1) Depending on the version.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/15

Time Relays
General data
3RT19 circuit diagrams
Control circuits (example circuits)
with delayed 3RT19 .6-2G star-delta auxiliary switch block.
for pushbutton operation
Size S00 Sizes S0 to S3
L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V
L1(L+) AC 50Hz ...V
F0 95
F1 F0 95
96 F1
96
S0
S0
S1
S1
13
K1 (.3)
14 K1
(.4)
27 37
(.3) (.3)
K4
27 38 K1 K2
28 38 (.4) (.4)
K4
22 22 28 37
K3 K2 (.2) (.2)
21 21 K3 K2
K4 K1 K2 K3 (.1) (.1)
K4 K2 K3 K1
N(L ) N(L )
NSB00946a NSB00947
for maintained-contact operation

Size S00 Sizes S0 to S3
L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC) ...V L1(L+) AC 50Hz ...V

Legend:
8 F0
F1
96
95 F0
F1
95
96
S0 "OFF" button
S1 "ON" button
S S S Maintained-contact switch
13
K1 K1 Line contactor
14
(.3) (.3) K2 Star contactor

27 37
K4 27 38 K1 K2 K3 Delta contactor
(.4) (.4)
28 38 K4
28 37 K4 Timer or time relay
22 22 (.2) (.2)
K3 K2 K3 K2
21 21 (.1) (.1)
K4 K1 K2 K3
F0 Fuse
K4 K2 K3 K1
F1 Overload relay
N(L ) N(L )
NSB00948a NSB00949
Contact 27/28 of the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block with star-delta function is only closed
on the star level. It is open on the delta level as well as when the power is switched off.
Solid-state time relay block

for size S00 to S3 3RT10 contactors and 3RH11 auxiliary contacts
3RT19 16-2C... 3RT19 26-2C... 3RT19 16-2D.../3RT19 26-2D... $ time relay block
L1/L+ L1/L+ L1/L+ % contactor
--- can be connected
NSB00943
NSB00944
NSB00945a
S1 ✖ Do not connect!
A1 A1 A2 A1 B1 A2
1 1
1
A1 A2 A1 A2
2 2 A1 A2
2
A1 A2 A1 A2
A1 A2
N/L N/L N/L
with ON-delay with ON-delay OFF-delay

(with auxiliary voltage)
8/16 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Time Relays
Time relays in 22.5 mm industrial enclosure
■ Overview ■ Functions
Standards • Changing the time setting ranges and the functions are only ef-
fective when carried out in de-energized state.
The time relays comply with: • Start input B1 or B3 must only be triggered when the supply
• EN 60721-3-3 "Environmental conditions" voltage is applied.
• EN 61812-1 (VDE 0435 Part 2021) "Solid-state relays, time re- • The same potential must be applied to A1 and B1 or A3 and
lays" B3. With two-voltage versions, only one voltage range must be
• EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 "Electromagnetic compatibil- connected.
ity" • The activation of loads parallel to the start input is not permis-
• EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200) "Low-voltage controlgear, sible when using AC control voltage (see circuit diagrams).
switchgear and systems – Electromechanical controlgear" • Surge suppression is integrated in the time relay. This prevents
the generation of voltage peaks on the supply voltage when the
relay is switched on and off. No damping measures are inte-
grated at the contacts.
3RP15 time relays, width 22.5 mm • 3RP15 05-.R must not be operated next to heat sources
> 60 °C.
LED for indicating
"Time relay on voltage" Operating time
adjustment
Parallel load on start input
LED for indicating
"Relay switched" L1
Inspection window for
Time setting set time range
S1
range selector
switch
Function Inspection window for A1 B1
switch set function K2 K1
A2
N
Decive labeling
plate NSB0_01423 NSB00895
8
L1
Accessories K1 S1
Push-in lugs for screw mounting
A1 B1
K2 K1
A2
N
NSB00896
Sealable cover
Label set for marking the multifunction relay
■ Area of application
Time relays are used in control, starting, and protective circuits
for all switching operations involving time delays. They guaran-
tee a high level of functionality and a high repeat accuracy of
timer settings.
Casing design
All time relays are suitable for snap-on mounting onto 35 mm
standard mounting rails to EN 60715 or for screw fixing.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/17

Time Relays
■ Selection and ordering data

Screw-type and spring-loaded connection • Single or selectable time setting ranges
• Switching position indication by LED
Solid-state time relays for general use in control systems and • Voltage indication by LED
mechanical engineering with For function table, see General data.
• 1 changeover contact or 2 changeover contacts
Version Time setting Rated control supply DT Screw connection PS* Weight DT Spring-loaded PS* Weight
range t voltage Us per PU terminal per PU
adjustable by AC 50/60 Hz DC Order No. approx. Order No. approx.
rotary switch
to
V V kg kg
3RP15 05 time relays, multifunction, 15 time setting ranges
The functions can be adjusted by means of rotary switches. Indicator labels can be used to adjust different functions of the 3RP15 05 time
relay clearly and unmistakably.
The corresponding labels can be ordered as an accessory. The same potential must be applied to terminals A. and B.1)
with LED and
1 changeover 0.05 ... 1 s - 12 A 3RP15 05-1AA40 1 unit 0.120 C 3RP15 05-2AA40 1 unit 0.145
contact, 0.15 ... 3 s 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP15 05-1AQ30 1 unit 0.140 A 3RP15 05-2AQ30 1 unit 0.125
8 functions 0.5 ... 10 s 24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP15 05-1AP30 1 unit 0.141 A 3RP15 05-2AP30 1 unit 0.126
1.5 ... 30 s 24 ... 2404) 24 ... 2404) } 3RP15 05-1AW30 1 unit 0.132 A 3RP15 05-2AW30 1 unit 0.132
2 changeover 0.05 ... 1 min 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP15 05-1BQ30 1 unit 0.158 A 3RP15 05-2BQ30 1 unit 0.133
contacts, 5 ... 100 s
24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP15 05-1BP30 1 unit 0.161 A 3RP15 05-2BP30 1 unit 0.137
16 functions 0.15 ... 3 min
24 ... 2404) 24 ... 2404) } 3RP15 05-1BW30 1 unit 0.164 A 3RP15 05-2BW30 1 unit 0.143
0.5 ... 10 min
400 ... 440 - } 3RP15 05-1BT20 1 unit 0.169 –
3RP15 05-1B 1.5 ... 30 min
2 changeover 0.05... 1 h 24 ... 240 24 ... 240 } 3RP15 05-1RW30 1 unit 0.163 A 3RP15 05-2RW30 1 unit 0.143
contacts, posi- 5 ...100 min
tively driven and 0.15... 3 h
8 hard gold-
plated
5 6
0.5 ... 10 h
1.5 ... 30 h
8 functions ) ) 5 ...100 h
∞2)
3RP15 1. time relays, ON-delay, 1 time setting range
with LED and 0.5 ... 10 s 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP15 11-1AQ30 1 unit 0.104 A 3RP15 11-2AQ30 1 unit 0.092
1 changeover 24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP15 11-1AP30 1 unit 0.105 A 3RP15 11-2AP30 1 unit 0.106
contact 1.5 ... 30 s 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP15 12-1AQ30 1 unit 0.104 A 3RP15 12-2AQ30 1 unit 0.092
24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP15 12-1AP30 1 unit 0.104 A 3RP15 12-2AP30 1 unit 0.090
5 ... 100 s 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP15 13-1AQ30 1 unit 0.104 C 3RP15 13-2AQ30 1 unit 0.094
24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP15 13-1AP30 1 unit 0.103 A 3RP15 13-2AP30 1 unit 0.094
3RP15 1-1A
3RP15 25 time relays, ON-delay, 15 time setting ranges
with LED and
1 changeover 0.05 ... 1 s 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP15 25-1AQ30 1 unit 0.105 C 3RP15 25-2AQ30 1 unit 0.095
contact 0.15 ... 3 s 24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP15 25-1AP30 1 unit 0.104 A 3RP15 25-2AP30 1 unit 0.093
2 changeover 0.5 ... 10 s 42 ... 48/60 42...48/603) } 3RP15 25-1BR30 1 unit 0.152 C 3RP15 25-2BR30 1 unit 0.127
contacts 1.5 ... 30 s 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP15 25-1BQ30 1 unit 0.152 C 3RP15 25-2BQ30 1 unit 0.128
0.05 ... 1 min 24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP15 25-1BP30 1 unit 0.152 A 3RP15 25-2BP30 1 unit 0.127
5 ... 100 s 24 ... 2403) 24 ... 2404) } 3RP15 25-1BW30 1 unit 0.159 A 3RP15 25-2BW30 1 unit 0.134
0.15 ... 3 min
0.5 ... 10 min
3RP15 25-1A... 1.5 ... 30 min
0.05 ... 1 h
5 ... 100 min
0.15 ... 3 h
0.5 ... 10 h
1.5 ... 30 h
5 ... 100 h
∞2)
3RP15 27 time relays, ON-delay, two-wire design,
4 time setting ranges
1 NO contact 0.05 ... 1 s 24 ... 66 24...663) } 3RP15 27-1EC30 1 unit 0.099 C 3RP15 27-2EC30 1 unit 0.090
(semiconductor) 0.2 ...4 s
1.5 ... 30 s
12 ... 240 s
90 ... 240 90...2404) } 3RP15 27-1EM30 1 unit 0.100 C 3RP15 27-2EM30 1 unit 0.090
3RP15 27-1E...
1) For functions, see 3RP19 01-0. label set. 5) Positively driven: NO and NC are never closed simultaneously; contact
2) At switch position ∞, no timing. For test purposes (ON/OFF function) on gap ≥ 0.5 mm is ensured, minimum make-break capacity 12 V, 3 mA.
site. Relay is constantly on when activated, or relay remains constantly off 6) The changeover contacts are actuated simultaneously, as a result of which
when activated. Depending on which function is set. only 8 functions are selectable (no star-delta, no instantaneous contact).
3) Operating range 0.8 to 1.1 x Us.
4) Operating range 0.7 to 1.1 x Us.

Time Relays

Screw and spring-loaded connection • Single or selectable time setting ranges
• Switching position indication by LED
Solid-state time relays for general use in control systems and • Voltage indication by LED
mechanical engineering with For function table, see "Time relays, General data".
• 1 changeover contact or 2 changeover contacts
Version Time setting Rated control supply voltage DT Screw connection PS* Weight DT Spring-loaded PS* Weight
range t Us per PU terminal per PU
adjustable by AC 50/60 Hz DC Order No. approx. Order No. approx.
rotary switch
to
V V kg kg
3RP15 3. time relays, OFF-delay, with auxiliary voltage, 1 time
setting range
with LED and 1 0.5 ... 10 s 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP15 31-1AQ30 1 unit 0.135 C 3RP15 31-2AQ30 1 unit 0.124
changeover 24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP15 31-1AP30 1 unit 0.136 A 3RP15 31-2AP30 1 unit 0.122
contact. The 1.5 ... 30 s 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP15 32-1AQ30 1 unit 0.138 C 3RP15 32-2AQ30 1 unit 0.125
same potential 24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP15 32-1AP30 1 unit 0.139 A 3RP15 32-2AP30 1 unit 0.121
must be 5 ... 100 s 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP15 33-1AQ30 1 unit 0.139 C 3RP15 33-2AQ30 1 unit 0.123
applied to ter- 24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP15 33-1AP30 1 unit 0.135 C 3RP15 33-2AP30 1 unit 0.125
minals A and
B.
3RP15 3-1A
3RP15 40 time relays, OFF-delay, without auxiliary voltage,
7 time setting ranges1)
with LED and
1 changeover 0.05 ... 1 s 24 242) } 3RP15 40-1AB30 1 unit 0.116 A 3RP15 40-2AB30 1 unit 0.105
contact 0.15 ... 3 s 100 ... 127 100...1273) } 3RP15 40-1AJ30 1 unit 0.119 A 3RP15 40-2AJ30 1 unit 0.108
0.3 ... 6 s 200 ... 240 200...2403) } 3RP15 40-1AN30 1 unit 0.119 A 3RP15 40-2AN30 1 unit 0.110
2 changeover 0.5 ... 10 s 24 242) } 3RP15 40-1BB30 1 unit 0.159 A 3RP15 40-2BB30 1 unit 0.136
1.5 ... 30 s
contacts
3 ... 60 s
5 ... 100 s
100 ... 127
200 ... 240
100...1273)
200...2403)
}
}
3RP15 40-1BJ30
3RP15 40-1BN30
1 unit 0.161
1 unit 0.161
C
A
3RP15 40-2BJ30
3RP15 40-2BN30
1 unit
1 unit
0.136
0.136 8
3RP15 40-1A...
3RP15 55 time relays, clock-pulse relay, 15 time setting ranges
with LED and 0.05 ... 1 s 42 ... 48/60 42...48/605) A 3RP15 55-1AR30 1 unit 0.111 C 3RP15 55-2AR30 1 unit 0.102
1 changeover 0.15 ... 3 s 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP15 55-1AQ30 1 unit 0.111 C 3RP15 55-2AQ30 1 unit 0.100
contact 0.5 ... 10 s 24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP15 55-1AP30 1 unit 0.111 A 3RP15 55-2AP30 1 unit 0.104
1.5 ... 30 s
0.05 ... 1 min
5 ... 100 s
0.15 ... 3 min
0.5 ... 10 min
3RP15 55-1A... 1.5 ... 30 min
0.05 ... 1 h
5 ... 100 min
0.15 ... 3 h
0.5 ... 10 h
1.5 ... 30 h
5 ... 100 h
∞4)
3RP15 60 time relays, star-delta function, dead interval 50 ms
and overtravel time, 1 time setting range
3 NO Star-delta 24/100 ... 127 24 A 3RP15 60-1SQ30 1 unit 0.172 A 3RP15 60-2SQ30 1 unit 0.151
contacts3) 1 ... 20 s, 24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP15 60-1SP30 1 unit 0.171 C 3RP15 60-2SP30 1 unit 0.152
(common con- overtravel
tact root termi- time (idling)
nal 17) 30 ... 600 s
For function
tables, see
general data.
3RP15 60-1S...
3RP15 7. time relays, star-delta function6), dead interval 50 ms,
1 time setting range
1 NO contact 1 ... 20 s 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP15 74-1NQ30 1 unit 0.113 A 3RP15 74-2NQ30 1 unit 0.100
instantaneous 24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP15 74-1NP30 1 unit 0.112 A 3RP15 74-2NP30 1 unit 0.100
and 1 NO con- 3 ... 60 s 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP15 76-1NQ30 1 unit 0.112 A 3RP15 76-2NQ30 1 unit 0.102
tact delayed 24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP15 76-1NP30 1 unit 0.113 A 3RP15 76-2NP30 1 unit 0.104
(common con-
tact root termi-
nal 17)
3RP15 7.-1N...
1) Setting of output contacts in as-supplied state not defined (bistable relay). 4) With selection ∞, no timing. For test purposes (ON/OFF function) on site.
Application of the control voltage once results in contact changeover to the For dead time "infinite", the relay is always off. For pulse time "infinite", the
correct setting. relay is always on.
2) Operating range 0.7 to 1.25 x Us. 5) Operating range 0.8 to 1.1 x Us.
3) Operating range 0.85 to 1.1 x Us. 6) For typical circuit, see General data.
* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/19

Time Relays
Version Function Code Application DT Order No. PS* Weight

letter per PU
approx.
kg
Label sets
Accessory for 3RP15 05 (not included in the scope of supply). The label set offers the possibility of labeling time relays with the set
function in English and German.
Complete set with ON-delay A for relays with } 3RP19 01-0A 1 set 0.003
with 8 functions OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage B 1 changeover
1 set = 5 units contact and
ON-delay and OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage C 3RP15 05-
flashing, starting with interval D .RW30
passing make contact E
passing break contact with auxiliary voltage F
pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage G
additive ON-delay with auxiliary voltage H
Complete set with ON-delay A for relays with } 3RP19 01-0B 1 set 0.003
with OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage B 2 changeover
16 functions contacts
1 set = 5 units ON-delay and OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage C
flashing, starting with interval D
passing make contact E
passing break contact with auxiliary voltage F
pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage G
additive ON-delay with auxiliary voltage and H●
instantaneous contact
A●
8 ON-delay and instantaneous contact
OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage and instanta-
neous contact
B●
ON-delay and OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage C●

and instantaneous contact
flashing, starting with interval, and instantaneous D●
contact
passing make contact and instantaneous contact E●
passing break contact with auxiliary voltage and F●
instantaneous contact
pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage and instanta- G●
neous contact
star-delta function *∆
Covering caps and push-in lugs
Push-in lug for screw fixing for relays with } 3RP19 03 10 units 0.002
1 or 2
changeover
contacts
Sealable cap for securing against unauthorized adjustment of for relays with } 3RP19 02 5 units 0.004
setting knobs 1 or 2
changeover
contacts
Tools for opening spring-loaded terminal connections

up to max. 2.5 mm2 conductor cross-sections. (orange) for all 3RP20 8WA2 804 1 unit 0.012
Length: approx. 100 mm; 3.5 x 0.5 time relays
with spring-
loaded termi-
nal connec-
tions
8WA2 803
Length: approx. 175 mm; 3.5 x 0.5 (green) for all 3RP20 8WA2 803 1 unit 0.024
time relays
with spring-
loaded termi-
nal connec-
8WA2 804 tions
Length: approx. 160 mm, 2.5 x 0.4 (green) for all 3RP15 8WA2 807 1 unit 0.023
time relays with
spring-loaded
terminal con-
nections
8WA2 807

Time Relays
45 mm SIRIUS Design time relays
Standards • Changing the time setting ranges and the functions is only ef-
fective when carried out in de-energized state.
The time relays comply with: • Start input B1 or B3 must only be triggered when the supply
• EN 60721-3-3 "Environmental conditions" voltage is applied.
• EN 61812-1 (VDE 0435 Part 2021) "Solid-state relays, time re- • The same potential must be applied to A1 and B1 or A3 and
lays" B3. With two-voltage version, only one voltage range must be
• EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 "Electromagnetic compatibil- connected.
ity" • The activation of loads parallel to the start input is not permis-
• EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200) "Low-voltage controlgear, sible when using AC (see diagrams).
switchgear and systems – Electromechanical controlgear" • Surge suppression is integrated in the time relay. This prevents
• EN 61140 "Safe electrical isolation" the generation of voltage peaks on the supply voltage when the
relay is switched on and off. No additional damping measures
are necessary.
3RP20 time relay, width 45 mm
LED for indicating Time relay with multifunction

"Time relay excited"
(left) The functions can be adjusted by means of rotary switches. In-
dicator labels can be used to adjust different functions of the
LED for indicating 3RP20 05 time relay clearly and unmistakably. The correspond-
"Relay switched" Function
(right) ing labels can be ordered as an accessory. The same potential
switch must be applied to terminals A. and B.
Time setting
range selector Time setting
switch range adjuster,
analog 3RP20 05 with one changeover contact
NSB0_01424
Device labeling
plate corresponds to the functions of 3RP15 05-.A. 8
3RP20 05 with two changeover contacts
Accessories
corresponds to the functions of 3RP15 05-.B.
Label set for marking the multifunction relay
Parallel load on start input

L1
S1
A1 B1
K2 K1
A2
N
NSB00895
Time relays are used in control, starting, and protective circuits L1

for all switching operations involving time delays. They guaran-
tee a high level of functionality and a high repeat accuracy of K1 S1
timer settings.
A1 B1
K2 K1
A2
N
NSB00896
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/21

Time Relays
45 mm SIRIUS Design time relays

Multifunction 3RP20 05 time relay clearly and unmistakably. The correspond-
ing labels can be ordered as an accessory. The same potential
The functions can be adjusted by means of rotary switches1). In- must be applied to terminals A. and B..
dicator labels can be used to adjust different functions of the
Version Time setting Rated control supply volt- DT Screw PS* Weight DT Spring-loaded PS* Weight
range t age Us connection per PU terminal per PU
approx. approx.
AC 50-60 Hz DC Order No. Order No.
V V kg kg
3RP20 05 time relays, multifunction, 15 time setting ranges
with LED and 0.05 ... 1 s 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP20 05-1AQ30 1 unit 0.118 } 3RP20 05-2AQ30 1 unit 0.120
1 changeover 0.15 ... 3 s 24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP20 05-1AP30 1 unit 0.118 } 3RP20 05-2AP30 1 unit 0.121
contact, 8 0.5 ... 10 s
functions1)2) 1.5 ... 30 s
0.05 ... 1 min
5 ... 100 s
0.15 ... 3 min
0.5 ... 10 min
1.5 ... 30 min
0.05 ... 1 h
3RP20 05-1BW30 5 ... 100 min
0.15 ... 3 h
0.5 ... 10 h
1.5 ... 30 h
5 ... 100 h
∞3)
with LED and 0.05 ... 1 s 24 ... 2404) 24 ... 2405) } 3RP20 05-1BW30 1 unit 0.128 } 3RP20 05-2BW30 1 unit 0.131
8 2 changeover
contacts, 16
functions1)
0.15 ... 3 s
0.5 ... 10 s
1.5 ... 30 s
0.05 ... 1 min
5 ... 100 s
0.15 ... 3 min
0.5 ... 10 min
1.5 ... 30 min
0.05 ... 1 h
5 ... 100 min
0.15 ... 3 h
0.5 ... 10 h
1.5 ... 30 h
5 ... 100 h
∞3)
3RP20 25 time relays, ON-delay, 15 time setting ranges
with LED and 0.05 ... 1 s 24/100 ... 127 24 } 3RP20 25-1AQ30 1 unit 0.106 } 3RP20 25-2AQ30 1 unit 0.110
1 changeover 0.15 ... 3 s 24/200 ... 240 24 } 3RP20 25-1AP30 1 unit 0.106 } 3RP20 25-2AP30 1 unit 0.108
contact2) 0.5 ... 10 s
1.5 ... 30 s
0.05 ... 1 min
5 ... 100 s
0.15 ... 3 min
0.5 ... 10 min
1.5 ... 30 min
3RP20 25-1AP30 0.05 ... 1 h
5 ... 100 min
0.15 ... 3 h
0.5 ... 10 h
1.5 ... 30 h
5 ... 100 h
∞3)
1) For functions, see 3RP19 01-0. label set, Page 8/20.

2) Units with safe electrical isolation.
3) With switch position ∞, no timing. For test purposes (ON/OFF function) on
site. Relay is constantly on when activated, or relay remains constantly off
when activated. Depending on which function is set.
4) Operating range 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us.
5) Operating range 0.7 ... 1.1 x Us.

Time Relays
Time relays for front panel mounting

Version Time setting Rated control supply voltage Us DT Order No. PS* Weight
range t AC 50-60 Hz DC per PU
approx.
V V kg
7PV41 48 time relays, ON-delay, 6 analog time setting ranges
with LED and 0.1 ... 1 s 24/110 24 } 7PV41 48-1BG30 1 unit 0.125
2 delayed 1 ... 10 s 24/220 ... 240 24 } 7PV41 48-1BP30 1 unit 0.125
changeover contacts 0.1 ... 1 min
or 1 ... 10 min
1 delayed 0.1 ... 1 h
changeover contact 1 ... 10 h
+ 1 instanteneous
changeover contact
7PV41 48
7PV43 48 time relays, multifunction, 6 analog time setting ranges
with LED and 1 0.1 ... 1 s 24/110 24 A 7PV43 48-1AG30 1 unit 0.108
changeover con- 1 ... 10 s 24/220 ... 240 24 } 7PV43 48-1AP30 1 unit 0.110
tact, ON-delay, 0.1 ... 1 min
OFF-delay with auxil- 1 ... 10 min
iary voltage, pulse- 0.1 ... 1 h
forming, passing 1 ... 10 h
make contact1)
7PV43 48
7PV33 48 time relays, multifunction, digitally adjustable, 11 time setting ranges
}
with LCD display,
1 changeover con-
tact, ON-delay,
0.01 s ... 9999 h 24/110 ... 240 24 7PV33 48-2AX34 1 unit 0.133
8
OFF-delay with auxil-
iary voltage, flash-
ing, pulse starting,
interval starting,
passing make con-
tact, pulse-forming,
non-volatile setting
7PV43 49
parameters; the
elapsed time is not
saved2)
Version Configuration DT Order No. PS* Weight

per PU
approx.
kg
Sockets
Socket 11-pole socket with rear connection } 7PX9 921 1 unit 0.051
7PX9 921
11-pole socket for DIN rail and mounting } LZX:MT78750 1 unit 0.063
LZX:MT78750
1) No parallel load on terminal B1 permitted!

2) Possibility of connecting parallel load to terminal B1!
Note
7PV41 and 7PV43 are obsolete types! Do not plan with them in
new applications and projects. A new development with a wider
functionality and a modified base is due in the middle of 2004.
For new applications we recommend the use of 7PV33.

Time Relays
Time relays for mounting onto contactors

for contac- Auxiliary contacts Rated control supply volt- Time setting range t DT Order No. PS* Weight
tors Function age Us per PU
Time relay energized approx.
Time relay closed
Contact open
Type V S kg
For size S00,1) with screw connection
Terminal designations to EN 46199 Part 5
• ON-delay (varistor integrated)
3RT10 1, 1 NO + 1 NC AC/DC 24 0.05 ... 1 } 3RT19 16-2EJ11 1 unit 0.085
3RH11 0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 16-2EJ21 1 unit 0.084
A1/A2
5 ... 100 C 3RT19 16-2EJ31 1 unit 0.086
NSB00933
27/28 AC 100 ... 127 0.05 ... 1 C 3RT19 16-2EC11 1 unit 0.087
35/36
0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 16-2EC21 1 unit 0.087
t
5 ... 100 } 3RT19 16-2EC31 1 unit 0.086
AC 200 ... 240 0.05 ... 1 A 3RT19 16-2ED11 1 unit 0.088
0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 16-2ED21 1 unit 0.089
3RT19 16-2... 5 ... 100 } 3RT19 16-2ED31 1 unit 0.087
• OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage (varistor integrated)2)
1 NO + 1 NC AC/DC 24 0.05 ... 1 } 3RT19 16-2FJ11 1 unit 0.087
> 200 ms 0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 16-2FJ21 1 unit 0.086
A1/A2
5 ... 100 } 3RT19 16-2FJ31 1 unit 0.089
AC 100 ... 127 0.05 ... 1 C 3RT19 16-2FK11 1 unit 0.086
NSB00934
27/28 0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 16-2FK21 1 unit 0.087

35/36
5 ... 100 C 3RT19 16-2FK31 1 unit 0.088
AC 200 ... 240 0.05 ... 1 A 3RT19 16-2FL11 1 unit 0.089
t
0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 16-2FL21 1 unit 0.086
5 ... 100 } 3RT19 16-2FL31 1 unit 0.089
8 • OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage

1 changeover contact AC/DC 24
AC 100 ... 127
0.5 ... 10 B
B
3RT19 16-2LJ21
3RT19 16-2LC21
1 unit
1 unit
0.060
0.062
AC 200 ... 240 B 3RT19 16-2LD21 1 unit 0.063
• Star-delta function (varistor integrated)
1 NO, delayed + 1 NO, in- AC/DC 24 1.5 ... 30 } 3RT19 16-2GJ51 1 unit 0.086
stantaneous, dead time 50 ms AC 100 ... 127 D 3RT19 16-2GC51 1 unit 0.087
AC 200 ... 240 } 3RT19 16-2GD51 1 unit 0.088
A1/A2
NSB00935
Y 27/28
D 37/38
t 50 ms
3
For sizes S0 to S12 ), with screw connection
• with ON-delay
3RT10 2, 1 NO + 1 NC AC/DC 24 0.05 ... 1 D 3RT19 26-2EJ11 1 unit 0.081
3RT10 3, 0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 26-2EJ21 1 unit 0.081
3RT10 4 A1/A2
5 ... 100 C 3RT19 26-2EJ31 1 unit 0.082
NSB00936
-7/-8 AC 100 ... 127 0.05 ... 1 C 3RT19 26-2EC11 1 unit 0.083
0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 26-2EC21 1 unit 0.083
-5/-6
5 ... 100 D 3RT19 26-2EC31 1 unit 0.083
t
AC 200 ... 240 0.05 ... 1 D 3RT19 26-2ED11 1 unit 0.085
0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 26-2ED21 1 unit 0.085
3RT19 26-2... 5 ... 100 C 3RT19 26-2ED31 1 unit 0.085
• OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage2)
1 NO + 1 NC AC/DC 24 0.05 ... 1 } 3RT19 26-2FJ11 1 unit 0.083
> 200 ms 0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 26-2FJ21 1 unit 0.084
A1/A2
5 ... 100 } 3RT19 26-2FJ31 1 unit 0.085
AC 100 ... 127 0.05 ... 1 D 3RT19 26-2FK11 1 unit 0.087
NSB00937
-7/-8 0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 26-2FK21 1 unit 0.084

-5/-6
5 ... 100 C 3RT19 26-2FK31 1 unit 0.087
t
AC 200 ... 240 0.05 ... 1 D 3RT19 26-2FL11 1 unit 0.086
0.5 ... 10 A 3RT19 26-2FL21 1 unit 0.084
5 ... 100 } 3RT19 26-2FL31 1 unit 0.086
• star-delta function
1 NO, delayed + 1 NO, in- AC/DC 24 1.5 ... 30 } 3RT19 26-2GJ51 1 unit 0.084
stantaneous, dead time 50 ms AC 100 ... 127 } 3RT19 26-2GC51 1 unit 0.085
A1/A2
NSB00938
Y -7/-8
D -7/-8
t 50 ms
1 NO, delayed + 1 NO, in- AC 200 ... 240 } 3RT19 26-2GD51 1 unit 0.088
stantaneous, dead time 50 ms
1) The terminals for the rated control supply voltage are connected to the 3) The terminals A1 and A2 for the rated control supply voltage of the solid-
contactor beneath by the integrated spring-type contacts of the solid-state state time-delay auxiliary switch block must be connected to the corre-
time-delay auxiliary switch block when mounting. sponding contactor by connecting leads.
2) Setting of output contacts in as-supplied state not defined (bistable relay).
Application of the control voltage once results in contact changeover to the
correct setting.

Time Relays
for contactors Function Rated control supply Time setting DT Order No. PS* Weight
voltage Us range t per PU
Time relay energized approx.
Contact closed
Contact open
Contactor energized
Type V S kg
For size S00, with semiconductor output and screw connection
for mounting onto the front of contactors
The electrical connection between the time-relay block and the contactor beneath is
established automatically when it is snapped on.
• ON-delay, two-wire version (varistor integrated)
3RT10 1, AC/DC 24 ... 66 0.05 ... 1 C 3RT19 16-2CG11 1 unit 0.051
A1/A2
NSB00939a
3RH11 Time relay 0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 16-2CG21 1 unit 0.051
5 ... 100 } 3RT19 16-2CG31 1 unit 0.054
Contactor t
A1/A2 AC/DC 90 ... 240 0.05 ... 1 A 3RT19 16-2CH11 1 unit 0.047
0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 16-2CH21 1 unit 0.047
3RT19 16-2C... 5 ... 100 } 3RT19 16-2CH31 1 unit 0.051
• OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage (varistor integrated)
AC/DC 24 ... 66 0.05 ... 1 C 3RT19 16-2DG11 1 unit 0.052
NSB00940a
A1/A2
Time relay 0.5 ... 10 C 3RT19 16-2DG21 1 unit 0.052
B1/A2
5 ... 100 C 3RT19 16-2DG31 1 unit 0.057
Contactor > 35 ms
A1/A2 AC/DC 90 ... 240 0.05 ... 1 D 3RT19 16-2DH11 1 unit 0.053
t
0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 16-2DH21 1 unit 0.053
3RT19 16-2D... 5 ... 100 C 3RT19 16-2DH31 1 unit 0.052
For sizes S0 to S3, with semiconductor output and screw connection
for mounting onto coil terminals on top of the contactors
The electrical connection between the relay block and the corresponding con-
tactor is established by screwing the two connecting pins of the time-relay
block to coil terminals A1/A2 on top of the contactor.
8
• ON-delay, two-wire version (varistor integrated)
3RT10 2, AC/DC 24 ... 66 0.05 ... 1 A 3RT19 26-2CG11 1 unit 0.048
A1/A2
NSB00939a
3RT10 3, Time relay 0.5 ... 10 A 3RT19 26-2CG21 1 unit 0.049

3RT10 41) 5 ... 100 C 3RT19 26-2CG31 1 unit 0.048
Contactor t
A1/A2 AC/DC 90 ... 240 0.05 ... 1 } 3RT19 26-2CH11 1 unit 0.048
0.5 ... 10 } 3RT19 26-2CH21 1 unit 0.047
5 ... 100 } 3RT19 26-2CH31 1 unit 0.048
3RT19 26-2C...
• OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage (varistor integrated)
AC/DC 24 ... 66 0.05 ... 1 D 3RT19 26-2DG11 1 unit 0.050
NSB00940a
A1/A2
Time relay 0.5 ... 10 C 3RT19 26-2DG21 1 unit 0.051
B1/A2
5 ... 100 D 3RT19 26-2DG31 1 unit 0.051
Contactor > 35 ms
A1/A2 AC/DC 90 ... 240 0.05 ... 1 C 3RT19 26-2DH11 1 unit 0.050
t
0.5 ... 10 A 3RT19 26-2DH21 1 unit 0.050
3RT19 26-2D... 5 ... 100 C 3RT19 26-2DH31 1 unit 0.050
1) Not for 3RT10 4 contactor with 24 to 42 V rated control supply voltage.

Monitoring Relays
Temperature Monitoring Relays
General data
■ Overview Temperature drift

dependent on the length and cross-section of the leads with
The SIMIREL temperature monitoring relays 3RS10 and 3RS11 PT100 sensors and an ambient temperature of 20°C, in K:
can be used for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas Cable lengths Cross-section
media. The temperature is sensed by the sensor in the medium, in m in mm2
evaluated by the device and monitored for overshoot or under-
0.5 0.75 1 1.5
shoot or for staying within an operating range (window function).
The range comprises adjustable analog units with one or two 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
threshold values, digital units to DIN 3440, which are also a good 10 1.8 1.2 0.9 0.6
alternative to temperature controls for the low-end range, and 25 4.5 3.0 2.3 1.5
digital units for up to 3 sensors which have been optimized for 50 9.0 6.0 4.5 3.0
monitoring large motors. 75 13.6 9.0 6.8 4.5
100 18.1 12.1 9.0 6.0
200 36.3 24.2 18.1 12.1
Temperature 500 91.6 60.8 45.5 30.2
setting
LED for display
LED "Device on voltage" 3-wire measurement

"Up and Down" keys
LED "Relay switched" Rotary switch for
parameter selection To minimize the effects of the line resistances, a three-wire circuit
Hysteresis switch is often used. Using the additional wire, two measuring circuits
NSB0_01421 can be formed of which one is used as a reference. The signal
evaluator can then automatically calculate the line resistance
and take it into account.
■ Design I
T3
T2
The temperature monitoring relays comply with:
8 • IEC 60721-3-3 "Environmental conditions" PT 100
• IEC 60947-5-1 "Low-voltage controlgear, switchgear and sys-

tems – Electromechanical controlgear" T1
I
• EN 61000-6-4 "Basic technical standard for emitted interfer- NSB01324a
ence (Industry)"
• EN 61000-6-2 "Basic technical standard for immunity to inter-
ference (Industry)" Connection of thermocouples
• DIN EN 50042 "Designations for terminals" Based on the thermo-electrical effect, a differential temperature
• UL/CSA measurement will be performed between the measuring point
and the signal evaluator.
• DIN 3440 (3RS10 40, 3RS11 40, 3RS10 42, 3RS11 42).
This principle assumes that the signal evaluator knows the tem-
perature at the clamping point (T2). For this reason, the 3RS11
Connection of resistance-type thermometers temperature monitoring relay has an integral compensator that
determines this comparison temperature and builds it into the re-
2-wire measurement sult of the measurement.
When 2-wire temperature sensors are used, the resistances of The absolute temperature is therefore calculated from the ambi-
the sensor and wiring are added. The resulting systematic error ent temperature of the signal evaluator and the temperature dif-
must be taken into account when the signal evaluator is cali- ference measured by the thermocouple.
brated. A jumper must be clamped between terminals T2 and T3
for this purpose. Temperature detection is therefore possible (T1) without needing
to know the precise ambient temperature of the clamping point
I at the signal evaluator (T2).
T3
T2 The connecting cable is only permitted to be extended using
connecting leads that are made from the same material as the
PT 100 thermocouple. If a different type of conductor is used, an error
will result in the measurement.
T1
N iC r
NSB01323a
T 1 T 2
Wiring errors:
The errors that are generated by the wiring comprise approxi- N i N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 2 5 a
mately 2.5 Kelvin/Ohm. If the resistance of the wiring is not M e a s u r in g p o in t In te rn a l

known and cannot be measured, the wiring errors can also be r e fe r e n c e p o in t c o m p e n s a tio n
estimated using the following table.
More information can be found on the Internet under
www.feldgeraete.de/76/produkte/fuw.html
www.ephy-mess.de
or from
EPHY-MESS GmbH
8/26 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Monitoring Relays
General data
■ Functions Window monitoring (digital units only)

Once the temperature has reached the upper threshold ϑ1, the
Once the temperature has reached the set threshold ϑ1, the out- output relay K1 changes its output state as soon as the set time
put relay K1 changes its output state as soon as the set time t t has elapsed. The relay returns to its original state as soon as
has elapsed (K2 responds in the same manner to ϑ2). The time the temperature reaches the set hysteresis value.
delay t can only be adjusted with digital units (the following ap-
plies to analog units t = 0). K2 responds in the same manner to the lower threshold of ϑ2.
The relays return to their original state as soon as the tempera-
ture reaches the set hysteresis value. Open-circuit principle
NSB01330c
1
Temperature overshoot
2
Open-circuit principle
Us
NSB01326b t
1 K1
t
2 K2
t
Us
t
K1 Closed-circuit principle
t
K2 NSB01331c
t 1
2
Closed-circuit principle
1
NSB01327c
Us
K1
8
t
2 K2 t
t
Us
K1
t
K2 Principle of operation with memory function (3RS10 42,
t
t
3RS11 42), based on the example of temperature undershoot
using the closed-circuit principle
Temperature undershoot Once the temperature has reached the upper threshold ϑ1, the
output relay K1 changes its output state as soon as the set time
Open-circuit principle t has elapsed. (K2 responds similarly to ϑ2.). The relay only re-
NSB01328c
turns to the original state when the temperature falls below the
1 set hysteresis value and when terminals Y3 and Y4 have been
briefly jumpered.
2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 3 2 d
J 1
Us
t J 2
K1
t
K2 U s
t
Y 3 -Y 4
K 1 t
Closed-circuit principle
K 2 t
NSB01329b t
1
2
Us
K1
t
K2
t t
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/27

Monitoring Relays
General data
■ Characteristics
For thermocouples For resistance sensors
80
NSB01322
Resistance in ohm
Voltage in mV
NSB01321a
Type "E" Type"J" 5000
NTC
70
60 4000
Type "K"
50
3000
Type "N" KTY83 KTY84 PT1000
40
2000
30
Type "T"
20 1000
PT100
10
0
0 -100 0 100 200 300 400 500
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 Temperature in °C
Temperature in °C
Connection examples
3RS10 00, 3RS10 10 3RS11 20, 3RS11 21
A1 A3 A1
11
13 11
K1 K1
8 T1
T2 14 T- 1
14
12
12 23
T3 T+ K2
2
24
A2 A2
NSB0_01333b NSB0_01336b
3RS11 00, 3RS11 01
A1 A3
11
13 General equipment designations
K1
A1, A2, A3 terminals for rated control supply voltage
T-
14 K1, K2, K3 output relay
T+ 12
Equipment designation for 3RS10 00, 3RS10 10, 3RS11 00,

3RS11 01, 3RS10 20, 3RS10 30, 3RS11 20, 3RS11 21
A2 = LED: "Device connected to supply"
NSB0_01334b
ϑ1 = LED: "Relay 1 tripped"
3RS10 20, 3RS10 30

ϑ2 = LED: "Relay 2 tripped"
T1 to T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor
A1
T+/T- Sensor connection for thermocouples
11
K1
T1
14
1
T2 12
K2
23 . Important!
T3
2 When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used, T2
24 and T3 must be jumpered.
A2
NSB0_01335b
8/28 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Monitoring Relays
General data
Connection examples General equipment designations
3RS10 40, 3RS10 42 A1, A2, A3 terminals for rated control supply voltage
Y 1 / Y 2 / A 1 K1, K2, K3 output relay
Y 3 Y 4
M e m o ry / K 1 1 5
R e s e t 1 8
T 1 1 Equipment designation for 3RS10 40, 3RS10 42, 3RS11 40,
1 6
T 2 2 5 3RS11 42
T 3 K 2
2 2 8 ϑ1 = LED: "Relay 1 tripped"
2 6
K 3 3 3 ϑ2 = LED: "Relay 2 tripped"
R e a d y 3 4 Ready = LED: "Device is ready for operation"
A 2 T1 to T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 3 7 d
T+/T- = Sensor connection for thermocouples
Y1/Y2 connection for memory jumper for 3RS10 40, 3RS11 40 or
3RS11 40, 3RS11 42
Y3/Y4 Reset input for 3RS10 42, 3RS11 42
Y 1 / Y 2 / A 1
Y 3 Y 4 1 5
M e m o ry / K 1 . Important!
R e s e t 1 8
1 1 6 When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used, T2
2 5 and T3 must be jumpered.
K 2
T - 2 8
2
T + 2 6
3 3
K 3
R e a d y 3 4
A 2
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 3 9 c
8
3RS10 41 General equipment designations

A1, A2, A3 terminals for rated control supply voltage
Y1 Y2 A1
K1 15 K1, K2, K3 output relay
Memory
1T1 18
1 16
1T2
1T3 25 Equipment designation for 3RS10 41
K2
2T1
2T2 2 28 ϑ1 = LED: "Relay 1 tripped"
26
2T3
33 ϑ2 = LED: "Relay 2 tripped"
3T1 K3
3T2 Ready 34 Ready = LED: "Device is ready for operation"
3T3
A2
1T1 to 1T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor 1
NSB0_01338c
Y1/Y2 connection for memory jumper
. Important!
When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used, T2
and T3 must be jumpered.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/29

Monitoring Relays
Analog adjustable relays
■ Overview ■ Area of application

The analog SIMIREL temperature monitoring relays 3RS10 and The analog SIMIREL temperature monitoring relays 3RS10 and
3RS11 can be used for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid 3RS11 can be used in almost any application in which tempera-
and gas media. The temperature is sensed by the sensors in the ture overshoot or undershoot is not permitted, e.g.:
medium, evaluated by the device and monitored for overshoot or
undershoot. When the threshold values are reached, the output Monitoring of set temperature limit and output of alarm mes-
relay switches on or off depending on the setting. sages for:
• Motor and plant protection
■ Benefits • Switchgear cabinet temperature monitoring
• All devices are available alternatively with spring-loaded termi- • Freeze monitoring
nals • Temperature limits for process variables e.g. in the packaging
• All units except for AC/DC 24 V feature electrical isolation industry or electroplating
• Extremely easy operation using a rotary potentiometer • Controlling equipment and machines such as heating, climate
and ventilation systems, solar collectors, heat pumps or warm
• Variable hysteresis water supplies.
• Adjustable working principle for devices with 2 thresholds. • Bearing and gear oil monitoring.
• Monitoring of coolants.
8/30 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Monitoring Relays
Type 3RS10 00 3RS10 10 3RS11 00 3RS11 01 3RS10 20 3RS10 30 3RS11 20 3RS11 21
General data
Thermistor type PT100 TC type J TC type K PT100 TC type J TC type K
Width mm 22,5
Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
Rated power W/VA < 2/4
Auxiliary circuit
Contacts 1 NO + 1 NC 1 CO + 1 NO
• AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz A 3
• DC-13 at:
- 24 V A 1
- 240 V A 0.1
DIAZED fuse
• Operational class gl/Gg A 4
Short-circuit current (at 250 V) kA 1
Electrical endurance 100.000
AC-15 at 3 A
Mechanical endurance 3 × 106
mechanical operating cycles
Tripping unit
• Measuring accuracy at 20 °C ambi- typical < ± 5 % from upper limit of scale
ent temperature
(T20)
• Reference point accuracy

• Deviations due to ambient tempera-
ture
–
<2
<±5K
<3
–
<2
<±5K
<3 8
in % from measuring range
• Hysteresis settings
- for temperature 1 2 to 20 % from upper limit of scale
- for temperature 2 5 % from upper limit of scale
Sensor circuit
• Typical sensor current
- PT100 typical 1 % – typical 1 % –
• Open-circuit detection no
• Short-circuit detection no
• 3-wire conductor connection1) yes – yes –
Enclosure
Environmental influences
Permissible ambient temperature °C – 25 ... 60
Permissible storage temperature °C – 40 ... 80
Degree of protection to EN 60529 Terminals: IP20; cover: IP40
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 300
(pollution degree 3)
Conductor cross-section
• Screw connection M 3.5 (standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2)
- Solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4)/2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves 2
mm 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)
- AWG conductors, AWG 2 × (20 ... 14)
solid or stranded
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
• Spring-loaded terminal
- Solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1)
- Finely stranded, mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
without end sleeves
solid or stranded
- Corresponding opening tool 8WA2 807
Vibration resistance to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/ 5 ... 26/0.75
mm
Shock resistance to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 15/11
1) 2-wire connection of resistance sensors with wire jumper between
T2 and T3.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/31

Monitoring Relays

Analog adjustable evaluation units with one or two threshold 2 threshold values, the adjustable hysteresis only applies to
values threshold value 1. For the second threshold value, a fixed hyster-
esis of 5 % applies. The product range has been developed for
For analog adjustable units, the threshold values and the hyster- applications where a setting accuracy of ±5 % is sufficient.
esis of 2 to 20 % are set via a rotary potentiometer. For units with
Sensor Func- Measuring Rated control sup- DT Screw connection PS* Weight DT Spring-loaded PS* Weight
tion range ply voltage Us per PU terminal per PU
AC 50-60 Hz Order No. approx. Order No. approx.
°C V kg kg
Analog adjustable, 1 threshold value, width 22.5 mm; closed-
circuit principle; without memory; 1 NO + 1 NC
PT100 Over- – 50 ... + 50 AC/DC 24 V A 3RS10 00-1CD00 1 unit 0.150 C 3RS10 00-2CD00 1 unit 0.125
(resis- shoot AC 110/230 V A 3RS10 00-1CK00 1 unit 0.190 C 3RS10 00-2CK00 1 unit 0.163
tance 0 ... + 100 AC/DC 24 V A 3RS10 00-1CD10 1 unit 0.145 C 3RS10 00-2CD10 1 unit 0.125
sensor) AC 110/230 V A 3RS10 00-1CK10 1 unit 0.189 C 3RS10 00-2CK10 1 unit 0.165
0 ... + 200 AC/DC 24 V A 3RS10 00-1CD20 1 unit 0.145 C 3RS10 00-2CD20 1 unit 0.121
AC 110/230 V A 3RS10 00-1CK20 1 unit 0.186 C 3RS10 00-2CK20 1 unit 0.165
Under- – 50 ... + 50 AC/DC 24 V B 3RS10 10-1CD00 1 unit 0.150 C 3RS10 10-2CD00 1 unit 0.180
shoot AC 110/230 V B 3RS10 10-1CK00 1 unit 0.186 C 3RS10 10-2CK00 1 unit 0.180
0 ... + 100 AC/DC 24 V B 3RS10 10-1CD10 1 unit 0.150 C 3RS10 10-2CD10 1 unit 0.180
3RS10 00-1CD10
AC 110/230 V A 3RS10 10-1CK10 1 unit 0.190 C 3RS10 10-2CK10 1 unit 0.180
0 ... + 200 AC/DC 24 V B 3RS10 10-1CD20 1 unit 0.150 C 3RS10 10-2CD20 1 unit 0.125
AC 110/230 V B 3RS10 10-1CK20 1 unit 0.191 C 3RS10 10-2CK20 1 unit 0.165
Type J Over- 0 ... + 200 AC/DC 24 V B 3RS11 00-1CD20 1 unit 0.150 C 3RS11 00-2CD20 1 unit 0.125
(thermo- shoot AC 110/230 V B 3RS11 00-1CK20 1 unit 0.190 C 3RS11 00-2CK20 1 unit 0.180
couple) 0 ... + 600 AC/DC 24 V C 3RS11 00-1CD30 1 unit 0.149 C 3RS11 00-2CD30 1 unit 0.125
8 Type K
(thermo-
couple)
Over-
shoot
0 ... + 200
0 ... + 600
AC/DC 24 V
AC 110/230 V
AC/DC 24 V
B
B
B
3RS11 01-1CD20
3RS11 01-1CK20
3RS11 01-1CD30
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0.150
0.190
0.150
C
C
C
3RS11 01-2CD20
3RS11 01-2CK20
3RS11 01-2CD30
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0.122
0.180
0.125
+ 500 ... + 1000 AC/DC 24 V C 3RS11 01-1CD40 1 unit 0.150 C 3RS11 01-2CD40 1 unit 0.180
Analog adjustable for warning and tripping (2 threshold
values), width 22.5 mm; open/closed-circuit principle switch-
able; without memory; 1 NO + 1 CO
PT100 Over- – 50 ... + 50 AC/DC 24 V C 3RS10 20-1DD00 1 unit 0.166 C 3RS10 20-2DD00 1 unit 0.138
(resis- shoot AC/DC 24 ... 240 V A 3RS10 20-1DW00 1 unit 0.175 C 3RS10 20-2DW00 1 unit 0.149
tance 0 ... + 100 AC/DC 24 V A 3RS10 20-1DD10 1 unit 0.164 C 3RS10 20-2DD10 1 unit 0.143
sensor) AC/DC 24 ... 240 V A 3RS10 20-1DW10 1 unit 0.175 C 3RS10 20-2DW10 1 unit 0.149
0 ... + 200 AC/DC 24 V A 3RS10 20-1DD20 1 unit 0.166 C 3RS10 20-2DD20 1 unit 0.180
AC/DC 24 ... 240 V A 3RS10 20-1DW20 1 unit 0.175 C 3RS10 20-2DW20 1 unit 0.180
Under- – 50 ... + 50 AC/DC 24 V A 3RS10 30-1DD00 1 unit 0.165 C 3RS10 30-2DD00 1 unit 0.180
shoot AC/DC 24 ... 240 V A 3RS10 30-1DW00 1 unit 0.174 C 3RS10 30-2DW00 1 unit 0.180
3RS11 21-1DD40
AC/DC 24 ... 240 V A 3RS10 30-1DW10 1 unit 0.175 C 3RS10 30-2DW10 1 unit 0.180
AC/DC 24 ... 240 V B 3RS10 30-1DW20 1 unit 0.173 C 3RS10 30-2DW20 1 unit 0.152
Type J Over- 0 ... + 200 AC/DC 24 V A 3RS11 20-1DD20 1 unit 0.165 B 3RS11 20-2DD20 1 unit 0.140
(thermo- shoot A 3RS11 20-1DW20 1 unit 0.175 B 3RS11 20-2DW20 1 unit 0.151
couple) 0 ... + 600 AC/DC 24 V A 3RS11 20-1DD30 1 unit 0.167 B 3RS11 20-2DD30 1 unit 0.140
AC/DC 24 ... 240 V A 3RS11 20-1DW30 1 unit 0.175 B 3RS11 20-2DW30 1 unit 0.151
Type K Over- 0 ... + 200 AC/DC 24 V B 3RS11 21-1DD20 1 unit 0.165 B 3RS11 21-2DD20 1 unit 0.142
(thermo- shoot AC/DC 24 ... 240 V B 3RS11 21-1DW20 1 unit 0.179 B 3RS11 21-2DW20 1 unit 0.152
couple) 0 ... + 600 AC/DC 24 V A 3RS11 21-1DD30 1 unit 0.162 B 3RS11 21-2DD30 1 unit 0.142
AC/DC 24 ... 240 V B 3RS11 21-1DW30 1 unit 0.176 B 3RS11 21-2DW30 1 unit 0.152
+ 500 ... + 1000 AC/DC 24 V B 3RS11 21-1DD40 1 unit 0.167 B 3RS11 21-2DD40 1 unit 0.142
AC/DC 24 ... 240 V A 3RS11 21-1DW40 1 unit 0.175 B 3RS11 21-2DW40 1 unit 0.152

Monitoring Relays
Digitally adjustable relays to DIN 3440
The 3RS10 and 3RS11 SIMIREL temperature monitoring relays The short-circuit and wirebreak detection as well as the measur-
can be used for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas ing range is limited, depending on the sensor type.
media. The temperature is sensed by the sensor in the medium,
evaluated by the device and monitored for overshoot or under- Measuring range in °C for thermocouples
shoot or for staying within an operating range (window function). Sensor type Short-circuit Open- 3RS11 40 3RS11 42
The 3RS10 40 and 3RS11 40 relays meet the requirements of circuit Measuring range Measuring range
DIN 3440 as temperature monitors; the 3RS10 42 and 3RS11 42 in °C in °C
relays meet the requirements of DIN 3440 as temperature limit- j - X -99 ... +999 -99 ... +1200
ers; The relays are also an excellent alternative to temperature K - X -99 ... +999 -99 ... +1350
controls in the low-end performance range (2 or 3-point closed-
T - X -99 ... +400 -99 ... +400
loop control).
E - X -99 ... +999 -99 ... +999
■ Benefits N
S
-
-
X
X
-99 ... +999
-
-99 ... +999
0 ... 1750
• Very simple operation without complicated menu selections. R - X - 0 ... 1750
• Certification to DIN 3440. B - X - 400 ... 1800
• All devices are available alternatively with spring-loaded termi-
nals
• Two- or three-step control can be configured quickly. Measuring range in °C for resistance sensors
Sensor type Short-circuit Open- 3RS10 40 3RS10 42
■ Area of application circuit Measuring range Measuring range
in °C in °C
The 3RS10 40, 3RS10 42, 3RS11 40 and 3RS11 42 SIMIREL tem- PT100 X X 50 ... +500 50 ... +750
perature monitoring relays can be used in almost any application PT1000 X X 50 ... +500 50 ... +500
in which temperature overshoot or undershoot is not permitted,
KTY 83-110 X X 50 ... +175 50 ... +175
e.g.:
Monitoring of set temperature limits and output of alarm mes-
KTY 84
NTC1)
X
X
X
-
40 ... +300
80 ... 160
40 ... +300
80 ... 160
8
sages for:
1) NTC type: B57227-K333-A1 (100 °C: 1.8 KΩ; 25 °C: 32.762 KΩ).
• Plant and environment protection
• Temperature limits for process variables e.g. in the packaging
industry or electroplating
• Temperature limits for district heating plants
• Exhaust temperature monitoring
• Controlling equipment and machines such as heating, climate
water supplies.
• Motor, bearing and gear oil monitoring.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/33

Monitoring Relays
Type 3RS10 40/3RS10 42 3RS11 40 3RS11 42
General data
Width mm 45
Operating range V 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Auxiliary circuit
Contacts 1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO
• AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz A 3
• DC-13 at:
- 24 V A 1
- 240 V A 0.1
DIAZED fuse A 4
Operational class gl/Gg
AC-15 at 3 A
Tripping unit
• Measuring accuracy at 20 °C < ± 2 K, ± 1 digit < ± 5 K, ± 1 digit < ± 7 K, ± 1 digit
ambient temperature
(T20)
• Reference point accuracy – <±5K
• Deviations due to ambient % 0.05 per K deviation from T20
temperature
8 • Measuring cycle
ms 500
- for temperature 1 1 ... 99 Kelvin, for both values

• Adjustable delay time S 0 ... 999
Sensor circuit
- PT100 mA typical 1 – –
- PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC mA typical 0.2 – –
• Open-circuit detection yes1) yes yes
• Short-circuit detection yes no no
• 3-wire conductor connection yes2) – –
Enclosure
Degree of protection acc. to Terminals: IP20; Cover: IP40
EN 60529
Rated insulation voltage Ui AC V 300
- Solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4)/2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve 2
mm 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)
solid or stranded
- Solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Finely stranded, mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
without end sleeve
solid or stranded
- Corresponding opening tool 8WA2 8073)
Vibration resistance to IEC 68-2-6 Hz/mm 5 ... 26/0.75
Shock resistance to IEC 68-2-27 g/ms 15/11
1) Not for NTC B57227-K333-A1 (100 °C: 1.8 KΩ; 25 °C: 32.762 KΩ).
2) 2-wire connection of resistance sensors with wire jumper between
T2 and T3.
3) See Accessories for 3RP15 solid-state time relays, Page 8/20.
8/34 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Monitoring Relays

Digitally adjustable evaluation units The following parameters can be adjusted:
to DIN 3440 • Sensor type
• 2 threshold values, ϑ1, ϑ2
Temperature monitoring relays are very easy to operate. The • 1 hysteresis; applies to both thresholds (0 ... 99 k)
three-digit LED display always shows the current temperature. A • 1 delay time; applies to both thresholds (0 ... 99 k)
separate relay with NO contact is included for sensor monitor- • Open/closed-circuit principle switchable;
ing. The relay is switched off in parameterization mode. • Function: overshoot/undershoot or window monitoring
Wide-range voltage versions are electrically isolated. The tem-
perature ranges depend on the sensor type (see Functions).
Sensor Measuring Rated control DT Screw connection PS* Weight DT Spring-loaded PS* Weight
range supply voltage Us per PU terminal per PU
(measuring AC 50-60 Hz approx. approx.
range limit
depends on
the sensor)
°C V Order No. kg Order No. kg
Temperature sensors to DIN 3440, digitally adjustable,
2 threshold values, width 45 mm; 1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO,
memory function possible with external jumper.
Device parameters are non-volatile
PT100/1000; 50 ... +500 24 AC/DC A 3RS10 40-1GD50 1 unit 0.317 C 3RS10 40-2GD50 1 unit 0.267
KTY83/84; 24 ... 240 AC/DC A 3RS10 40-1GW50 1 unit 0.329 C 3RS10 40-2GW50 1 unit 0.281
NTC (resis-
tance sen-
sors)1)
TYPE J, K, T, 99 ... +999 24 AC/DC A 3RS11 40-1GD60 1 unit 0.318 C 3RS11 40-2GD60 1 unit 0.269
E, N (thermo- 24 ... 240 AC/DC A 3RS11 40-1GW60 1 unit 0.329 C 3RS11 40-2GW60 1 unit 0.300
3RS10 40-1GD50
couple)
8
Temperature sensors to DIN 3440, digitally adjustable,
2 threshold values manual/remote RESET,
width 45 mm; 1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO,
tripping status and device parameters are non-volatile
PT100/1000; 50 ... +750 24 AC/DC A 3RS10 42-1GD70 1 unit 0.317 C 3RS10 42-2GD70 1 unit 0.267
KTY83/84; 24 ... 240 AC/DC A 3RS10 42-1GW70 1 unit 0.329 C 3RS10 42-2GW70 1 unit 0.281
NTC (resis-
tance sen-
sors)1)
TYPE J, K, T, –99 ... +1800 24 AC/DC A 3RS11 42-1GD80 1 unit 0.318 C 3RS11 42-2GD80 1 unit 0.269
E, N, R, S, B 24 ... 240 AC/DC A 3RS11 42-1GW80 1 unit 0.329 C 3RS11 42-2GW80 1 unit 0.300
(thermocou-
ple)
Version Language used for labels DT Order No. PS* Weight

per PU
approx.
kg
Accessories
Replaceable cover labels for digital devices
Devices to DIN 3440 German C 3RS19 01-1A 5 units 0.006
English C 3RS19 01-1C 5 units 0.005
1) NTC type: B57227-K333-A1 (100 °C: 1.8 KΩ; 25 °C: 32.762 KΩ).

Monitoring Relays
Digitally adjustable relays for up to 3 sensors
The 3RS10 41 SIMIREL temperature monitoring relays can be The short-circuit and open-circuit detection as well as the mea-
used for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media. suring range is limited, depending on the sensor type.
The temperature is sensed by the sensor in the medium, evalu-
ated by the device and monitored for overshoot or undershoot or Measuring range in °C for thermocouples
for staying within an operating range (window function). The sig- Sensor type Open-circuit Short-circuit Measuring range
nal evaluator can evaluate up to 3 resistance sensors at the in °C
same time and is specially designed for monitoring motor wind- PT100 X X 50 ... +500
ings and bearings.
PT1000 X X 50 ... +500
■ Benefits KTY 83-110

KTY 84
X
X
X
X
50 ... +175
40 ... +300
• Very simple operation without complicated menu selections NTC - X +80 ... +160
• Space-saving with 45 mm width
• All devices are available alternatively with spring-loaded termi-
nals
• 2 or 3-point closed-loop control can be configured quickly.
The SIMIREL temperature monitoring relay 3RS10 41 can be
used in almost any application in which several temperatures
have to be monitored simultaneously for overshoot or under-
shoot or within a range.
Monitoring of set temperature limits and output of alarm mes-
sages for:
8 • Plant and environment protection
• Temperature limits for process variables e.g. in the packaging
industry or electroplating
• Controlling equipment and machines such as heating, climate
water supplies
• Motor, bearing and gear oil monitoring
8/36 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Monitoring Relays
Type 3RS10 41
General data
Width mm 45
Operating range V 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
Auxiliary circuit
Contacts 1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO
• AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz A 3
• DC-13 at:
- 24 V A 1
- 240 V A 0.1
DIAZED fuse
Operational class gl/Gg A 4
AC-15 at 3 A
Tripping unit
• Measuring accuracy at 20 °C < ± 2 K, ± 1 digit
ambient temperature (T20)
• Deviations due to ambient % 0.05 per K deviation from T20
temperature
• Measuring cycle ms 500
- for temperature 1
• Adjustable delay time
1 ... 99 Kelvin, for both values
S 0 ... 999
8
Sensor circuit
- PT100 mA typical 1
- PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC mA typical 0.2
• Open-circuit detection yes1)
• Short-circuit detection yes
• 3-wire conductor connection yes2)
Enclosure
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 Terminals: IP20; Cover: IP40
- Solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4)/2 × (0.5 ... 2.5) mm2
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 × (0.5 ... 1.5) mm2
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (20 ... 14)
- Solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Finely stranded, without end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (24 ... 16)
- Corresponding opening tool 8WA2 8073)
Vibration resistance to IEC 60068-2-6 5 ... 26 Hz/0.75 mm
Shock resistance to IEC 60068-2-27 15 g/11 ms
1) Not for NTC B57227-K333-A1 (100 °C: 1.8 kΩ; 25 °C: 32.762 kΩ).
2) 2-wire connection of resistance sensor with wire jumper between
T2 and T3.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/37

Monitoring Relays

Digitally adjustable signal evaluators The following parameters can be adjusted:
• Sensor type
The digitally adjustable temperature monitoring relays are very • 2 threshold values, ϑ1, ϑ2
simple to operate. The three-digit LED display always shows the • 1 hysteresis; applies to both thresholds (0 ... 99 K)
current temperature. A separate relay with an NO contact is in- • 1 delay time; applies to both thresholds (0 ... 999 s)
cluded for sensor monitoring. The relay is switched off in param- • Open/closed-circuit principle
eterization mode. • Function: overshoot or undershoot or window monitoring
Wide-range voltage versions are electrically isolated. The tem-
perature ranges depend on the sensor type (see Function).
Sensor Num- Measuring Rated control sup- DT Screw PS* Weight DT Spring-loaded PS* Weight
ber of range ply voltage Us connection per PU terminal per PU
sen- approx. approx.
sors
Order No. Order No.
°C V kg kg
Motor monitoring relays, digitally adjustable for up to 3 sensors,
width 45 mm; 1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO
PT100/1000; 1 to 3 -50 ... + 500 AC/DC 24 ... 240 V A 3RS10 41-1GW50 1 unit 0.333 C 3RS10 41-2GW50 1 unit 0.283
KTY83/84; sen-
NTC sors
(resistance
1
sensor) )
3RS10 41-1GW50
8
Version Language used for labels DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Accessories
Replaceable cover labels for digital devices
Motor monitoring relay German C 3RS19 01-1B 5 units 0.006
English C 3RS19 01-1D 5 units 0.006
1) NTC type: B57227-K333-A1 (100 °C: 1.8 kΩ; 25 °C: 32.762 kΩ)

Monitoring Relays
Thermistor Motor Protection
For PTC sensors
■ Overview 4000
Thermistor motor protection devices are used for direct monitor-
ing of the motor winding temperature. For this purpose, the mo- R
1330
tors are equipped with temperature-dependent resistors (PTC)
that are directly installed in the motor winding and abruptly 550
change their resistance at their limit temperature.
■ Benefits
250
• Thanks to direct motor protection, overdimensioning of the mo-

tors is not necessary.
• No additional overload protection equipment is necessary. 20
NSB00320
• No settings on the device are necessary. -20°C 0 TNF-20 TNF TNF+15 T
• Electronically optimized output thanks to variants with gold- TNF-5 TNF+5
plated contacts.
The characteristics of the Type A temperature sensors are de-
• Rapid error diagnosis thanks to variants that indicate open- scribed in the IEC 60034-11-2 (DIN VDE 0660 Part 303),
and short-circuit in the sensor circuit. DIN 44081 and DIN 44082 standards.
• Screw-type or spring-loaded terminals.
■ Area of application Use in areas subject to explosion hazard
Direct motor protection through temperature monitoring of the The devices are approved for Equipment group II, Category (2)
motor winding offers 100 % motor protection even under the in Area "G" (areas that contain explosive gases, vapor, spray and
most difficult ambient conditions, without the need to make ad- air mixtures).
justments on the device. Versions with gold-plated contacts en- With PTB 01 ATEX 3218 ex II (2) G, compliance with guideline
sure, in addition, a high switching reliability that is even higher 94/9 EG Appendix II is confirmed. The safety devices must be
than an electronic control:
• At increased ambient temperatures
selected with suitable settings for the safe operation of motors of
the "Increased safety" (Eex e) and "Flameproof enclosure(Eex d)
8
degrees of protection and are accessed outside the area sub-
• For high switching cycle frequency ject to explosion hazard.
• For long start-up and braking procedures
PTB 01 ATEX 3218 x II (2) G
• In combination with frequency converters (low speeds).
The increased danger in areas subject to explosion hazard de-
■ Design mands careful analysis of the operator's guide, the safety and
commissioning instructions and the standard (EN 60 079-14 /
The 3RN1 tripping units are suitable for use in any climate and VDE 0165) for electronic equipment in areas subject to gas ex-
finger-safe according to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 and meet the plosion hazards.
requirements of the basic technical standard EN 61000-6-2, A risk analysis must be performed for the complete plant or ma-
EN 61000-6-4, "Electro-magnetic compatibility of I&C equipment chine. If this risk analysis results in a minimal potential for danger
in industrial process engineering" and DIN VDE 0660 Parts 302 (Safety Category 1), all 3RN1 TMS tripping units can be imple-
and 303, IEC 60034-11-2, Section 1 and 2 "Thermal machine mented taking into account the safety notes. In the case of
protection for rotating electrical machines, temperature sensors plants or machines with a high potential risk, variants with inte-
and tripping units" and "Positive temperature coefficient sensors grated short-circuit detection in the sensor circuit are necessary.
and tripping units".
Approvals for use in potentially explosive dust areas on request.
The terminals of the auxiliary contacts are designated in accor-
dance with EN 50005. The units satisfy the requirements of the following classes:
The 3RN1 tripping units are suitable for snap-mounting onto Unit Class
35 mm standard rails according to EN 60715 or for screw- 3RN10 00, 3RN10 10, 3RN10 11-.C, DIN V 19250: AK2
mounting using an adapter (accessories). 3RN10 12-.C, 3RN10 22, 3RN10 62 EN 954-1: Category 1
Any mounting position is possible. 3RN10 11-.B, 3RN10 11-.G, DIN V 19250: AK3
3RN10 12-.B, 3RN10 12-.G, EN 954-1: Category 2
For devices with the "Manual RESET" function, the blue Test/ 3RN10 13
RESET button can be pressed for > 2 s to activate the test func-
tion and to simulate tripping.
The measuring circuit leads must be routed as separate control
If a Type A temperature sensor is connected to a Type A tripping leads. It is not permitted to use cores from the supply line of the
unit, compliance with the operating temperatures is assured (on motor or any other main supply cables. If extreme inductive or
pick-up and reset) according to IEC 60034-11-2 (DIN VDE 0660 capacitive interference is expected as a result of power lines
Part 303). routed in parallel, shielded control leads must be used.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/39

Monitoring Relays
For PTC sensors
Cable routing
■ Functions
Maximum cable length for sensor circuit cables
The 3RN1 tripping units operate in accordance with the closed-
Conductor Cable length in m for tripping units circuit principle and therefore monitor themselves for open-cir-
cross-section without short-circuit detection with short-circuit detection 1) cuit (except: warning output in the case of 3RN10 22). A momen-
in mm2 3RN10 00, 3RN10 10 3RN10 11-.B/-.G tary power failure of less than 50 ms does not change the status
3RN10 11-.C 3RN10 12-.B/-.G of the auxiliary contacts.
3RN10 12-.C 3RN10 13
3RN10 22, 3RN10 62 The 3RN10 11, 3RN10 12 and 3RN10 13 units with 2 changeover
2.5 2 x 2800 2 x 250 contacts are also equipped with short-circuit detection in the
1.5 2 x 1500 2 x 150 sensor circuit. The unit will trip in the event of a short-circuit in the
sensor circuit (resistance in sensor circuit < 20 Ω).
0.5 2 x 500 2 x 50
1) A short-circuit in the sensor circuit will be detected up to this maximum All tripping units (except for AC/DC 24 V) feature galvanic isola-
cable length. tion between the control circuit and the sensor circuit.
3RN10 00 compact tripping unit
Note: The compact tripping unit is equipped with a red LED (TRIPPED)
for the tripped display and a changeover contact.
Tripping of the thermistor protection relay even in combination
with a converter must directly result in disconnection. This must After the unit has tripped, it is automatically reset once the ther-
be implemented with circuitry. mistors have cooled down. The root of the changeover contact
is connected to the control voltage (95 is connected to terminal
Mounting and installation must only be performed by qualified A1).
personnel who observe the applicable regulations! For assem-
bly, use installation manual No.: 3ZX1012-0RN10-1AA1. This unit is particularly suitable in circuits in which the control cir-
cuit and signaling circuit have the same potential, e.g. in local
The 3RN10 is not intended for installation in hazardous areas. control boxes.
For installation in areas subject to explosion hazards, the 3RN1
must be enclosed in a flameproof casing. Standard tripping units 3RN10 10, 3RN10 11, 3RN10 12,
3RN10 13
8 For tripping units with a AC/DC 24 V control voltage, galvanic
isolation must be secured with a battery network or a safety The standard units are equipped with two LEDs (READY and
transformer to EN 61558. TRIPPED) for an operating and tripped display and are available
When tripping units with auto-RESET function are used, a reset with either 1 NO + 1 NC or with 2 CO contacts. They are available
is performed automatically after the cooling time has expired. It depending on the design with automatic RESET (3RN10 10),
must be ensured by means of an external interlock (latching with manual/remote RESET (3RN10 11) or manual/automatic and re-
a separate On and Off button) that the machine to be monitored mote RESET (3RN10 12 and 3RN10 13). Remote RESET can be
does not start up again spontaneously. achieved by connecting an external pushbutton with a normally-
open function to terminals Y1 and Y2. If terminals Y1 and Y2 are
Units with the "auto-RESET" function must not be used in appli- bridged, tripping will be followed by an automatic RESET.
cations in which the unexpected restart can lead to personal in-
jury or property damage. The 3RN10 11, 3RN10 12 and 3RN10 13 units with 2 COs also
have short-circuit monitoring in the sensor circuit.
In the case of tripping units without short-circuit detection, dur-
ing commissioning or after modifications or maintenance work The 3RN10 12 and the 3RN10 13 are non-volatile. This means
(assembly, disassembly) on the equipment, the sensor resis- that even if the control voltage fails, a trip that preceded it will be
tance must be measured using a suitable measuring instrument. latched.
For resistances < 50 Ω, the sensor circuit must be checked for a In the case of the 3RN10 13 tripping unit, tripping due to a short-
short-circuit. circuit in the sensor circuit will be indicated by a flashing red
If 3RN10 00 units are used to protect Eex e motors, separate LED. The monostable design also indicates open-circuit in the
monitoring of the control voltage is recommended because there sensor circuit by flashing of the red LED.
is no Ready LED to indicate connection to the supply voltage. 3RN10 22 "Warning and disconnection" tripping unit
If 3RN10 13-.BW01 units are used to protect Eex e motors, sep- Two sensor circuits can be connected to one 3RN10 22 tripping
arate monitoring of the control voltage is recommended be- unit that acts on one output relay with 1 NO contact for warning
cause the switching status of the auxiliary contacts does not and 1 CO for disconnection. Temperature sensors with different
change if the control voltage fails (use of a bistable relay is rec- rated response temperatures TNF are used to implement the
ommended). "Warning" and "Disconnection" functions. When the "Warning"
Before commissioning, the effectiveness of the protection func- sensor circuit responds, a yellow LED is lit and when the "Dis-
tion must be checked. connection" circuit responds, a red LED is lit.
The sensor circuits have a different reset response and operat-
ing behavior:
"Warning" (terminals 2T1, T2) only features automatic RESET and
uses the open-circuit principle.
"Disconnection" (terminals 1T1, T2) can be changed from man-
ual RESET to automatic RESET by bridging terminals Y1 and Y2.
Remote RESET is implemented by connecting an external push-
button with a normally-open function.
8/40 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Monitoring Relays
For PTC sensors
1
3RN10 62 tripping unit for multiple motor protection 3RN10 11 )
Up to 6 sensor circuits can be connected to the 3RN10 62 trip- NSB0_00315b
ping unit, all of which act on one output relay. The simultaneous
A1/A2
protection of several motors (up to 6) is an advantage for multi- 3800
motor drives (e.g. if one motor is overloaded, all the other motors 1500
T1/T2
of the drive will be shut down). Apart from the red LED "TRIPPED, RESET
that signals the switching status of the tripping unit, a LED is as- (Y1/Y2)
signed to each sensor circuit which indicates the sensor circuit
that has responded. Unused sensor circuits must be short-cir- K
cuited.
LED Tripped
The reset response of the 3RN10 62 tripping units can be
changed from manual RESET to automatic RESET by bridging
terminals Y1 and Y2. Remote RESET is implemented by con- 3RN10 13-...01 (bistable)
necting an external pushbutton with a normally-open function.
NSB0_00316a
A1/A2
3800
Response of the tripping unit in the event of control voltage 1500
failure T1/T2
For RESET
sensor circuit, see 3RN10 13 function diagram.
(Y1/Y2)
Response monostable non-volatile
monostable bistable
K
3RN10 00 3RN10 12 3RN10 13-...01 3RN10 13-...01
3RN10 10 3RN 10 13-...0 LED Tripped
3RN10 11 3RN10 22
for 3RN10 62
Failure of the con- Unit trips Unit trips No change in
trol voltage state of the auxil- 3RN10 121)/3RN10 22/3RN10 62
iary contacts
Return of the con- Unit resets
trol voltage with-
Unit resets No change in
state of the auxil- A1/A2
NSB0_00317a
8
out a preceding iary contacts 3800
1500
tripping operation T1/T2
Return of the con- Unit resets Unit remains tripped No change in RESET
trol voltage after a state of the auxil- (Y1/Y2)
preceding trip- iary contacts
ping operation K, K2
LED Tripped
Safe electrical isolation
All circuits (outputs, control circuits, sensor and RESET circuits) 3RN10 13-...0
of the multifunction tripping units 3RN10 13-1BW10 and 3RN10
NSB0_00318a
13-1GW10 (wide voltage range, monostable output relay and
screw-type terminals) are safely isolated from each other up to a A1/A2
rated voltage of 300 V according to DIN VDE 0100 Part 410/ 3800
1500
DIN VDE 0106. T1/T2
RESET
(Y1/Y2)
Function diagrams
K
3RN10 00/3RN10 10
LED Tripped
(Auto-RESET)
NSB0_00314b
3RN10 22 only
A1/A2
3800 NSB0_00319b
1500 3800
T1/T2 1500
2T1/T2
K
K1
LED Tripped
LED Alarm
1) For versions with 2 COs (3RN10 1.G...), see 3RN10 13. function diagram
for short-circuit response of sensor circuit
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/41

Monitoring Relays
For PTC sensors
Type 3RN10 00 3RN10 10 3RN10 11 3RN10 12 3RN10 13 3RN10 22 3RN10 62
Compact Standard units Multifunc- Warning + Motor protec-
units tion units tripping tion
General data
Width mm 22.5 45
Number of connectable sensor circuits 1 2 6
1
Response in the event of control voltage )
failure
Manual RESET no yes
Automatic RESET yes no yes
Remote RESET no yes2) yes
TEST button no yes
Short-circuit detection in sensor circuit no yes (for 2-CO units) yes no
Short-circuit and no yes3) no
open-circuit indication
Warning and switching off in one unit no yes no
Tripping unit
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 300
Permissible ambient temperature °C -25 ... +60
Permissible storage temperature °C -40 ... +80
EMC tests EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP20
Screw connection M 3.5 (standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2)
8 • Solid
• Finely stranded, with end sleeves
mm2
mm2
1 × (0.5 ... 4)/2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (20 ... 14)
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
Spring-loaded terminals
• Solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded, with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1)
• Finely stranded, without end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 × (24 ... 16)
• Corresponding opening tool 8WA2 8074)
Sensor circuit
• Measuring circuit load RF ≤ 1.5 kΩ mW ≤ 5
• Voltage in sensor circuit at RF ≤ 1.5 kΩ V ≤2
• Response temperature °C 60 ... 180
(depends on sensor)
• Coupling time s about 5
(depends on sensor)
Summation PTC resistance RF kΩ ≤ 1.5
(per sensor loop)
• Operating value kΩ 3.4 ... 3.8
• Return value kΩ 1.5 ... 1.65
• Response tolerance °C ± 6
1) See Overview.
2) Remote RESET possible by disconnecting control voltage.
3) Open-circuits are only indicated by monostable versions
(3RN10 13-....0).
8/42 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Monitoring Relays
For PTC sensors
Type 3RN10 00 3RN10 10 3RN10 11 3RN10 12 3RN10 13 3RN10 22 3RN10 62

Compact Standard units Multifunc- Warning + Motor protec-
units tion units tripping tion
Control circuit
Rated control supply voltage Us 1)
Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us

• 110 V/230 V AC
• 24 V to 240 V AC/DC 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
• 24 V AC/DC 0.85 ...1.2 × Us for DC operation , 0.85 ...1.1 × Us for AC operation
Rated power
• AC W <2
• AC/DC W <2
• DC W <2
Max. mains buffering time ms 50
Auxiliary circuit
Conventional thermal current Ith A 5
Rated operating current Ie
• AC-15 240 V A 3
• DC-13 24 V A 1 for units with 1 CO or 2 COs 12) 1 2
2 for units with 1 NC + 1 NO
Short-circuit protection acc. to Alpha/Lovag A 6
CSA and UL rated data, control circuit
Rated control voltage 50/60 Hz
• AC V 300
• DC V 300
Switching capacity R 300/B 300
Safe isolation up to 300 V - 3RN10 13- -
1) See Selection and ordering data.

1BW10
8
2) 2 A for 3RN10 13-.BW01 (bistable output relays).
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/43

Monitoring Relays
For PTC sensors

Thermistor motor protection relays for PTC thermistors • 3RN10 13-.BW01: bistable version, does not trigger in the
(Type A PTCs) event of control supply voltage failure
• Monostable version with closed-circuit principle, triggers in the • All units except for 24 V DC feature electrical isolation
event of control supply voltage failure
RESET Contacts Rated control sup- DT Screw connection PS* Weight DT Spring-loaded PS* Weight
ply voltage Us per PU terminal per PU
50/60 Hz approx. approx.
Order No. Order No.

V kg kg
Compact signal evaluation units, width 22.5 mm, 1 LED
Terminal A1 is jumpered with the root of the
changeover contact
Auto 1 CO 24 AC/DC } 3RN10 00-1AB00 1 unit 0.109 A 3RN10 00-2AB00 1 unit 0.099
110 AC } 3RN10 00-1AG00 1 unit 0.150 } 3RN10 00-2AG00 1 unit 0.137
230 AC } 3RN10 00-1AM00 1 unit 0.149 } 3RN10 00-2AM00 1 unit 0.137
Standard evaluation units, width 22.5 mm, 2 LEDs
Auto 1 NO + 1 NC 24 AC/DC A 3RN10 10-1CB00 1 unit 0.127 A 3RN10 10-2CB00 1 unit 0.111
110 AC } 3RN10 10-1CG00 1 unit 0.167 A 3RN10 10-2CG00 1 unit 0.149
230 AC } 3RN10 10-1CM00 1 unit 0.167 A 3RN10 10-2CM00 1 unit 0.150
24 ... 240 AC/DC A 3RN10 10-1CW00 1 unit 0.138 A 3RN10 10-2CW00 1 unit 0.119
2 COs 24 AC/DC A 3RN10 10-1BB00 1 unit 0.153 B 3RN10 10-2BB00 1 unit 0.139
110 AC A 3RN10 10-1BG00 1 unit 0.203 B 3RN10 10-2BG00 1 unit 0.139
230 AC A 3RN10 10-1BM00 1 unit 0.204 B 3RN10 10-2BM00 1 unit 0.180
2 COs. hard 24 AC/DC A 3RN10 10-1GB00 1 unit 0.154 B 3RN10 10-2GB00 1 unit 0.139
gold-plated
3RN10 12- Manual/remote1) 1 NO + 1 NC 24 AC/DC } 0.154 }
8 2CK00 110 / 230 AC
Short-circuit detection for sensor circuit
}
3RN10 11-1CB00
3RN10 11-1CK00
1 unit
1 unit 0.179 }
3RN10 11-2CB00
3RN10 11-2CK00
1 unit
1 unit
0.114
0.154
Manual/remote1) 2 COs 24 AC/DC A 3RN10 11-1BB00 1 unit 0.155 B 3RN10 11-2BB00 1 unit 0.131
110 AC A 3RN10 11-1BG00 1 unit 0.205 C 3RN10 11-2BG00 1 unit 0.182
230 AC B 3RN10 11-1BM00 1 unit 0.204 A 3RN10 11-2BM00 1 unit 0.181
2 COs, hard 24 AC/DC B 3RN10 11-1GB00 1 unit 0.155 B 3RN10 11-2GB00 1 unit 0.154
gold-plated
2
Non-volatile )
Manual/ 1 NO + 1 NC 24 AC/DC } 3RN10 12-1CB00 1 unit 0.140 A 3RN10 12-2CB00 1 unit 0.115
auto/remote 110 / 230 AC } 3RN10 12-1CK00 1 unit 0.180 A 3RN10 12-2CK00 1 unit 0.161
3RN10 13-
1BB00 Non-volatile2), short-circuit detection in sensor cir-
cuit
Manual/ 2 COs 24 AC/DC A 3RN10 12-1BB00 1 unit 0.154 B 3RN10 12-2BB00 1 unit 0.130
auto/remote 2 COs 110 AC A 3RN10 12-1BG00 1 unit 0.205 B 3RN10 12-2BG00 1 unit 0.130
2 COs 230 AC A 3RN10 12-1BM00 1 unit 0.205 B 3RN10 12-2BM00 1 unit 0.181
2 COs, hard 24 AC/DC A 3RN10 12-1GB00 1 unit 0.155 B 3RN10 12-2GB00 1 unit 0.161
gold-plated
Non-volatile2); short-circuit and open-circuit detec-
tion and indication in sensor circuit; wide-range volt-
age with screw connection with safe isolation
Manual/ 2 COs 24 AC/DC } 3RN10 13-1BB00 1 unit 0.160 A 3RN10 13-2BB00 1 unit 0.134
3RN10 13- auto/remote 24 ... 240 AC/DC } 3RN10 13-1BW10 1 unit 0.167 } 3RN10 13-2BW00 1 unit 0.145
1BW01
2 COs, hard 24 ... 240 AC/DC } 3RN10 13-1GW10 1 unit 0.168 A 3RN10 13-2GW00 1 unit 0.143
gold-plated
Evaluation units for 2 sensor circuits, warning and
switching off, width 22.5 mm, 3 LEDs
Test/RESET button, non-volatile2)
Manual/ 1 NO + 1 CO 24 ... 240 AC/DC } 3RN10 22-1DW00 1 unit 0.167 A 3RN10 22-2DW00 1 unit 0.147
auto/remote
Signal evaluation units for 6 sensor circuits, warning
and switching off, width 45 mm, 8 LEDs
Manual/ 1 NO + 1 NC 24 ... 240 AC/DC } 3RN10 62-1CW00 1 unit 0.296 A 3RN10 62-2CW00 1 unit 0.246
auto/remote
Bistable evaluation units, width 22.5 mm
Short-circuit and open-circuit detection and indica-
tion in sensor circuit
Manual/ 2 COs 24 ... 240 AC/DC A 3RN10 13-1BW01 1 unit 0.165 A 3RN10 13-2BW01 1 unit 0.139
auto/remote
Accessories
Push-in lugs for screw mounting } 3RP19 03 10 units 0.018
2 units required per 3RN1 thermistor motor protection device
1 package contains 10 units for 5 devices
1) The unit can be reset with the RESET button or by disconnecting the con-
trol supply voltage.
2) For more information on protection against voltage failure, see Page 8/40.

Monitoring Relays
For PTC sensors
Connection diagrams
Representation with control Representation with Representation with Representation with General item codes
voltage applied control voltage not control voltage applied control voltage not applied
applied
A1, A2 , A3 Connections of the con-
3RN10 00, 1 CO trol voltage
N Amplifier
A1/95 A1(11) T/R TEST/RESET button
Y1, Y2 Connections for
remote RESET
N H2 K (jumpered =
T1 T2 A2 96 98 (14) (12) auto-RESET)
NSB0_00322b ⇑ The double arrow
indicates an operating
status which deviates
3RN10 10, 1 NO + 1 NC 3RN10 10, 2 COs from the standard repre-
A1 95 97 (13) (21) A1 95 05 (11) (21) sentation of the contact
H1 H1 according to DIN 40900,
Part 7
N H2 K N H2 K (in this case: position of
the contacts when con-
T1 T2 A2 96 98 (14) (22) T1 T2 A2 96 98 06 08 (14) (12) (24) (22)
trol voltage is applied to
NSB0_00323a NSB0_01397
terminals A1 and A2)
3RN10 111), 1 NO + 1 NC 3RN10 11, 2 COs
A1 95 97 (13) (21) A1 95 05 (11) (21) Item code for 3RN10
H1 H1
H1 "READY" LED
N H2 K N H2 K H2 "TRIPPED" LED
K Output relay
T1 T2 A2 96 98 (14) (22) T1 T2 A2 96 98 06 08 (14) (12) (24) (22) T1, T2 Connections of the
NSB0_00323a NSB0_01398
T/R sensor loop
3RN10 121), 1 NO + 1 NC 3RN10 11, 2 COs Item code for

8
Y1 Y2 A1(A3) 95 97 (13) (21) 95 05 (11) (21) 3RN10 22
H1 H1 H1 "READY" LED
H2 K N H2 K H2 "TRIPPED" LED
N
H3 "ALARM" LED
T1 T2 A2 96 98 (14) (22) T1 T2 A2 96 98 06 08 (14) (12) (24) (22) K1, K2 Output relay
NSB0_00325a NSB0_01399 1T1 and T2 Connections of the
T/R T/R
2T1 and T2 sensor loop
3RN10 13-...0 (monostable)

. Important!
Y1 Y2 A1 95 05 (11) (21)
H1
Close unconnected sensor circuits
N H2 K
Item code for 3RN10 62
T1 T2 A2 96 98 06 08 (14) (12) (24) (22)
NSB0_01400
H1 to H6 LED for the tripped sen-
T/R sor loop
H7
3RN10 13-...1 (bistable) H8 "READY" LED
K "TRIPPED" LED
Y1 Y2 A1 95 05
1T1, 1T2 Output relay
H1 to Connections of the
N H2 K 6T1, 6T2 first sensor loop
Connections of the
T1 T2 A2 96 98 06 08 sixth sensor loop
NSB00327
T/R
. Important!
3RN10 22
Close unconnected sensor circuits
07(23) Y1 Y2 A1 95 (11)
H3 H2
K1 N N H1 K2
08(24) 2T1 1T1 T2 A2 96 98 (14) (12)
NSB0_00328c
T/R
3RN10 62
Y1 Y2 A1 N 95 97 (13) (21)
H1 2 3
H4 5 6 K
H7 H8
1T1 1T2 2T1 2T2 3T1 3T2 4T1 4T2 5T1 5T2 6T1 6T2 A2 96 98 (14) (22)
NSB0_00329a
T/R
1) For units with combination voltages AC 230 V/110 V
(3RN10 11-.CK00 and 3RN10 12-.CK00) the following applies:
A1 and A2: 230 V AC,
A3 and A2: 110 V AC.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/45

Monitoring Relays
Monitoring Relays for Electrical Variables
General data

The solid-state monitoring relays are offered in the field-proven Depending on the relay type, these relays can be used for mon-
design with different functions. These relays are used to detect itoring electrical and non-electrical variables. They respond, for
wear effects and potential faults at an early stage and to respond example, as soon as the set value is reached and drop as soon
to them before more serious secondary damage can occur. With as the value is below the set value.
their minimal space requirements, high measuring accuracy and
optimized functions for high reliability, they are easy to use. According to the relay version, they can be used for device and
system protection in AC and DC systems. Combined with circuit-
For example, the monitoring modes "Overcurrent/overvoltage" breakers, they can, for example, be used for overload protection
and "Undercurrent/undervoltage" can be set for the relay for cur- of motors in chain conveyors, packaging machines etc.
rent and voltage monitoring using a DIP switch. Similarly, the
latching/unlatching function as well as various delay times can
be set.
Type 3UG30/3UG35
Load capacity of the output relay Rated operating current Ie A max. 8
AC-15/230 V A 3
DC-13/24 V A 1
DC-13/48 V A 0.45
DC-13/60 V A 0.35
DC-13/110 V A 0.2
DC-13/230 V A 0.1
Minimum contact load mA 5/17 V for a fault of 1 ppm
Output relay Operational class gl/Gg A 4
DIAZED fuse protection1)
Electrical endurance Operating cycles 1 × 105
8 Mechanical endurance
Ambient temperature
Operating cycles
during operation
2 × 106
°C – 20 ... + 50
Conductor connection solid mm² 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
finely stranded, with end sleeves mm² 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)
Degree of protection Terminals: IP20
Housing IP40
Can be used in networks 3UG30 13/3UG35 11 AC V 660
other 3UG3 AC V 480
Vibration resistance to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/ 10 ... 150/0.035
mm
Note:
Fuse protection of the measurement circuit is not required for de-
vice protection. Conductor protection depends on the conductor
cross-section used.
1) Short-circuits without any contact welding to EN 60947-5-1.
8/46 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Monitoring Relays
General data
Voltage monitoring relay, single-phase Voltage monitoring relay, single-phase Phase monitoring relay, three-phase
3UG35 31, 3UG35 32 3UG35 34, 3UG35 35 3UG35 11
AC/ AC/DC L1 NSB00969
DC L2
IN1 IN2 IN3 L3
+ A1 (+) (+) (+) A1
11 11 L1 L2 L3
11 21
U >< U >< 3~
_ 12 14 12 14
A2 M A2 12 14 22 24
(-)
NSB00967c NSB00968
IN1/IN2/IN3: AC/DC A1/A2: AC/DC
Level monitoring relay Current monitoring relay, single-phase

3UG35 01 3UG35 21, 3UG35 22
AC
L 1
L 2
A C / M
L 3
A1 M Min Max D C
11
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3
+ A 1 (+ ) (+ ) (+ )
R >< 1 1
A2 12 14 I > <
_ M 1 2 1 4
A 2
NSB00970 (-)
N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 7 1 d
IN1/IN2/IN3: AC/DC
Voltage monitoring relay, three-phase

3UG30 41
Voltage monitoring relay with N, three-phase,
3UG30 42
Asymmetry monitoring relay, three-phase
3UG30 12 8
L1 NSB00973 L1 NSB00974 L1 NSB00975
L2 L2 L2
L3 L3 L3
N
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
<U 11 >U 21 L1 L2 L3 11
3~ <U 11 >U 21
> < 3~ 3~
U
> <
U
12 14 22 24 12 14
N 12 14 22 24
Underspeed monitoring relay Line monitoring relay, three-phase

3UG30 51 3UG30 13
+ U - L1 NSB00977
L2
L3
AC/ PNP L1 L2 L3
DC
11 21
3~
+ A1 +24 V RES IN1 0V
11 U<
n < Value 12 14 22 24
_
A2 IN2 + 8V2 12 14
NSB00976c
+ NAMUR
Power factor monitoring relay, Power factor monitoring relay, Power factor monitoring relay,
single- and three-phase, single- and three-phase, 3UG30 14, single- and three-phase, 3UG30 14
3UG30 14, three-phase operation, I < 10 Ak three-phase operation, I > 10 Ak single-phase operation, 230 Vk
L1 L1 L
L2 L2 M N
M K(P 1 ) L(P2 )
L3 L3 Load
k(S 1) l(S 2)
external current L1 L2 L3 IN1
L1 L2 L3 IN1 transformer <cos j 11 >cos j 21
L1 L2 IN1 L3
<cos j 11 >cos j 21 <cos j 11 >cos j 21 >cos j <
>cos j <
>cos j <
NSB01132b 12 14 22 24
NSB01130b 12 14 22 24 NSB01131b 12 14 22 24
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/47

Monitoring Relays
General data
Connection diagram for DC 24 V Connection diagram for 24...240 V DC
Current monitoring relay, single-phase Insulation resistance
3UG35 21, 3UG35 22 for ungrounded DC voltage networks
For current relays with a DC 24 V supply voltage, A2 and M must 24...240 V DC
not be jumpered in the device otherwise the relays will not func- L+
tion. The circuit diagrams below show that loads in DC measur- L
ing circuits must be upstream from the monitoring relay and that 24...240 V AC/DC
AC loads must only be connected via converters. Otherwise the A1 L+ 11
monitoring relay will be damaged and the short-circuit current 14
12 R
can cause damage to the plant.
Test L+
Reset Y1
Y2
Test L-
o .k . + L O A D
o .k . Y4
D C 2 4 V L o a d D C 2 4 V L 1 L 2 L 3 A2 L- PE Y3
NSB0_01396
N
A 1 IN A 1 IN
L-
PE
3 U G 3 3 U G 3
N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 9 9 d
Connection diagram for networks up to 400 V AC

D C 0 V A 2 M D C 0 V A 2 M
N S B 0 _ 0 1 2 0 0 d
M L O A D Insulation resistance
L o a d
for ungrounded voltage networks
3 x 230/400 V AC
R
L1
8
L2
L3
o .k
o .k . + L O A D
D C 2 4 V L 1 L 2 L 3 A1 A1 L 11
D C 2 4 V L O A D
A 1 IN Test 14
A 1 IN Reset 12
Y1
3 U G 3 3 U G 3
A2 B2 1) A2 B21) PE Y2
NSB0_01394a
N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 9 7 d
N 230 V N 230 V
N 115 V N 115 V
N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 9 8 d
D C 0 V A 2 M PE
D C 0 V A 2 M
M L O A D 1
L o a d A1-B2/A1-A2 für AC 115 V/230 V ) 3UG3081-1AK20 only
A1-A2 für AC/DC 24...240 V
Configuring note:
For measuring currents of 10 A and side-by-side mounting, the
maximum ambient temperature is 40 °C
The internal configuration of the 3UG35 21/22 current monitoring
relay for DC 24 V control supply voltage has been changed.
In the new internal circuit the control supply voltage and the
measuring-circuit voltage should not have the same reference
potential.
In cases in which the load to be monitored and the monitoring
relay are fed by the same power supply, the function of the cur-
rent monitoring relay is no longer provided. The devices are,
however, not destroyed as a result. Relief is provided in the form
of a second power supply that is not directly connected to the
control supply voltage.
Please therefore pay attention to the connection information
shown in the circuit diagram for the new current monitoring re-
lays!
8/48 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Monitoring Relays
Phases and voltage:
Phase failure and phase sequence monitoring
■ Functions
Depending on version, the 3UG35 11 and 3UG35 13 relays mon- 3UG35 13 for detection of phase failure
itor the phase sequence and failure of one of the three phases.
During operation, no adjustment is required. If the phase se- The fixed undervoltage detection ensures that the relay also trips
quence is correct and none of the three phases have failed, the in the case of voltage feedback from the motor. Feedback from
output relay picks up after the delay time T1 has elapsed and the the motor or caused by voltage loops will be detected at up to
LED is lit. On phase failure, the output relay trips after the delay 90 % of the rated voltage.
time T2 has elapsed and the LED is no longer lit.
If a phase sequence fault is detected when the voltage is N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 5 2
switched on, the relay will not pick up. U
L 1
L 3
L 2
The 3UG35 11 relay does not detect any voltage feedback L 2
L 3
into the supply T 2
The 3UG35 11 relay is not protected against feedback of voltage 1

into the supply. If there is a risk of feedback from a motor in the T 1 T 2 T 1
case of phase failure or voltage loops through parallel loads, the

3UG35 13 with fixed operating point or 3UG30 13 relays with ad- 1 O u tp u t r e la y
justable operating point can be used. T 1 : D e la y - tim e a t r is e
m a x . 2 0 0 m s
T 2 : D e la y - tim e a t d ro p
m a x . 3 0 0 m s
Type
Rated control supply voltage Us
3UG35 11
V 3 x 230 ... 400
3UG35 13
see Selection data
8
(phase-to-phase)
Voltage tolerance V 3 × 200 ...460 0.8 ...1.15 × Us
(corresponds to 0.85 ...1.15 × Us)
Power consumption
• at 200 V VA 5
• at 400 V VA 20
• at 460 V VA 25
Undervoltage detection fixed % none 90
Frequency of the monitored line Hz 50/60
Delay time
• T1 for correct phase sequence ms max.. 200
• T2 for phase failure ms approx. 300

Screw connection Phase monitoring relay, three-phase
• Monitoring of phase failure and phase sequence
Standard rail mounting • 1 yellow LED for indicating the relay state
Width 22.5 mm • 2 changeover contacts
Version Measuring range Ue Rated control supply DT Order No. PS* Weight
voltage Us per PU
AC 50/60 Hz AC 50/60 Hz approx.
V V kg
No tripping following voltage feedback by the consumer load
Measuring-circuit 3 × 230 ... 400 3 × 230 ... 400 } 3UG35 11-1BQ50 1 unit 0.120
voltage = control phase conductor voltage phase conductor volt-
supply voltage age
Detection following voltage feedback by the consumer load of
up to 90 %
Measuring-circuit 3 × 230 3 × 230 A 3UG35 13-1BL50 1 unit 0.112
voltage = control 3 × 400 3 × 400 A 3UG35 13-1BP50 1 unit 0.112
supply voltage phase conductor voltage

Monitoring Relays
Phases and voltage:
Phase asymmetry monitoring
■ Functions
The relay monitors voltage imbalances in the three-phase sys- The relay does not respond to a symmetrical overvoltage or un-
tem. If the phase sequence is correct and the imbalance is less dervoltage.
than the set threshold value, the output relay picks up and the
N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 5 3
yellow LED is lit. The relay trips when one of the following faults
occurs: L 1
• Incorrect phase sequence on terminals L1-L2-L3 L 2 L 3
• Failure of a phase L 3 L 2
• System imbalance greater than the set threshold. 1 0 0 %
1 2
A system imbalance means that the voltage of one of the phases 3 T 1 T 2
rises or falls in relation to the voltage of the other two phases.
4
This is used to detect voltage feedback from a running drive
T 3 T 3
(e.g. on failure of a fuse) of up to 95 % of the rated voltage as a
fault. 1 S e t a s y m m e tr ic a l v a lu e
2 H y s te re s is
The time delay T1 is only effective in the case of imbalance faults 3 D e g re e o f u n b a la n c e
4 O u tp u t r e la y
and when phase L3 fails. Hysteresis prevents the output relay
from continuously switching on and off when the system imbal-
ance is close to the set value.
Rated control supply voltage Us V see Selection data (L1/L2 also used to supply units)
Voltage tolerance 0.8 ...1.2 × Us
Maximum power consumption W/VA 4/8
8 Frequency of the measuring-circuit voltage
Max. setting range for asymmetry value
Hz 50/60 switchable
% adjustable to 5 to 20 % of the nominal supply voltage
Max. hysteresis % fixed at 10 % of set asymmetry value
Setting accuracy % ± 20 referred to maximum asymmetry value
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters % ±1
Deviations with temperature fluctuations %/°C ± 0.1
Delay time
• T1 when relay drops s adjustable to 0.5 ... 10 ± 60 % or T2 in case of phase failure of L1 or L2
• T3 when relay picks up s max. 1
• T2 in case of phase failure L1 or L2 ms max. 300
Mains buffering time ms 10

Screw connection Phase asymmetry monitoring relay, three-phase
• phase asymmetry monitoring
For mounting standard rail or screw fixing • phase sequence and phase failure monitoring
Width 45 mm • 1 yellow LED for indicating the relay state flashes during oper-
ating time T
• 1 green LED for indicating applied control supply voltage
• 1 changeover contact
Version Measuring-circuit volt- DT Order No. PS* Weight

ageUe per PU
AC 50/60 Hz approx.
V kg
Measuring-circuit voltage = control supply volt- 3 × 230 } 3UG30 12-1AL50 1 unit 0.299
age, asymmetry value and delay time, adjustable phase-to-phase voltage
3 × 400 } 3UG30 12-1AP50 1 unit 0.305

phase-to-phase voltage

Monitoring Relays
Phases and voltage:
Line monitoring
■ Functions
The 3UG30 13 relay monitors the phase sequence, failure of a Note:
phase and undershoot of the set measuring voltage by 20%. If
the phase sequence is correct and the monitored voltage corre- After failure of a phase on a rotating motor, a feedback voltage
sponds to the value of the set measuring voltage, the output re- of up to 70% of the set rated motor voltage is recognized as a
lay picks up and the LEDs for the operating voltage display and fault.
the relay status are lit. The setting for the measuring voltage can be increased to in-
If a phase fails, the output relay trips (in the case of failure of L3, crease the percentage for the maximum detectable feedback
only after the time T that can be set at the front) and the LED for into the supply.
relay status goes off. 1 N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 5 4
If the monitored voltage falls symmetrically (L1, L2 and L3 simul- L 1 2 0 %
taneously) or asymmetrically (only one phase) by more than 20%
of the set measuring voltage, the output relays will also trip after
L 2 2 0 %
the set time T has elapsed and the associated LED goes off.
If the monitored voltage rises again above a hysteresis of be- 2 0 %
L 3
tween 2% and 10% of the set measuring voltage, the output re-
lays pick up again and the LED is lit.
2
T T T
1 M e a s u r in g - c ir c u it v o lta g e n
Voltage tolerance
Maximum power consumption
V see Selection data
W/VA 5/8
8
Frequency of the monitored line Hz 50/60
Measuring-circuit voltage of the monitored line adjustable within the associated measuring range, absolute scale for Ue
Undervoltage detection % – 20 ± 10 of the set measuring-circuit voltage
Hysteresis
• with symmetrical undervoltage % fixed, 2...5 of the set measuring-circuit voltage
• with asymmetrical undervoltage % fixed, 5...10 of the set measuring-circuit voltage
Delay time T on detection of a line fault s adjustable 0.2 ... 10; ± 50%
Response time on detection of a disturbance ms 400
Availability time after application of Us ms 500
Operating frequency at max. make-break capacity 1/h 360

Screw connection Line monitoring relay, three-phase
• phase failure and phase sequence monitoring
For mounting onto standard rail or screw fixing • monitoring of the variable measuring-circuit voltage
Width 45 mm • 1 yellow LED for indicating the relay state
• 2 changeover contacts
Version Measuring range Rated control supply DT Order No. PS* Weight
Ue = voltage Us per PU
AC 50/60 Hz approx.
V kg
Phase conductor volt-
age
Measuring-circuit voltage = 3 × 180 ... 260 } 3UG30 13-1BL60 1 unit 0.317
control supply voltage, 3 × 320 ... 460 } 3UG30 13-1BP60 1 unit 0.313
measuring-circuit voltage and 3 × 380 ... 550 } 3UG30 13-1BR60 1 unit 0.356
delay time adjustable 3 × 460 ... 660 } 3UG30 13-1BS60 1 unit 0.355

Monitoring Relays
Phases and voltage:
■ Functions
The relays monitor single-phase voltages against the set thresh- with memory (MEMORY)
old. The products differ not only with respect to their measuring
ranges and voltage types but also with regard to their functions: If the set threshold is reached, the output relay changes its state
as soon as the set time T1 has elapsed and it remains latched in
• Supplied from an external auxiliary supply this position even when the measuring-circuit voltage reaches
(3UG35 31/3UG35 32) the set hysteresis value. The relay is reset (RESET) by switching
• Internal power supply and no auxiliary supply the supply voltage off and on again.
(3UG35 34/3UG35 35) A 1 /A 2 N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 5 6
• Overshoot/undershoot, latching/unlatching, selectable 3

(3UG35 31/3UG35 32/3UG35 34) 1
2
• Window principle with upper and lower threshold (3UG35 35) T 1
4
3 6
The latching/unlatching function can be set for the 3UG35 31,
2
3UG35 32 and 3UG35 34 relays using a DIP switch on the bot- 1
tom of the device. The 3UG35 34 relay has an internal power T 1
supply, i.e. in the following diagram, A1/A2 is replaced by the 5
6
measuring-circuit voltage.
1 T h r e s h o ld v a lu e e
Advantages of the products that are supplied from an exter- 2 H y s te r e s is
3 M e a s u r in g - c ir c u it
nal supply v o lta g e
• Extremely low loading on the measuring signals 4 O u tp u t r e la y
F u n c tio n O V E R
• Large measuring range is necessary 5 O u tp u t r e la y
F u n c tio n U N D E R
6 S to ra g e M E M O R Y
Advantages of the products that are supplied from an inter-
8 nal supply
3UG35 35 relay, internal power supply with windows-type
• No separate supply voltage is necessary
technology
• Low wiring overheads
The 3UG35 35 relay monitors the applied voltage using the win-
dows principle. The upper and lower thresholds are set and
Voltage monitoring without memory (NO MEMORY) monitored. As soon as the monitored voltage leaves the set
range, the output relay trips after the set time T1 has elapsed.
As soon as the measuring-circuit voltage reaches the set thresh-
old, the output relay changes its output state as soon as the set Configuring note:
time T1 has elapsed. The relay returns to its original state as When the upper and lower threshold are too close, the toler-
soon as the measuring-circuit voltage reaches the set hysteresis ances of the setting accuracy and of the two hysteresis settings
value. can result in undefined output states.
A 1 /A 2 N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 5 5
3
1
2 7
T 1 3 2
4 8
3
T 1 T 1
2
1 9 N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 5 9
T 1
5 2 H y s te re s is
3 M e a s u r in g - c ir c u it v o lta g e
7 U p p e r p e a k v a lu e
8 L o w e r p e a k v a lu e
2 H y s te r e s is
9 O u tp u t re la y
3 M e a s u r in g - c ir c u it v o lta g e
8/52 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Monitoring Relays
Phases and voltage:
Monitoring relays with external power supply
Type 3UG35 31 3UG35 32
Rated control supply voltage Us V see Selection data (for AC voltages with electrical isolation by means of
transformer, 24 V DC without electrical isolation)
Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category III
to DIN VDE 0110
Frequency of the measuring-circuit voltage Hz 40 ... 500 and DC
Threshold value Ue % adjustable to 10 ...100 of the selected measuring range
Hysteresis % adjustable from 5 to 50 % of the set threshold value
Setting accuracy % ± 10 referred to upper limit of measuring range
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters % ± 0.1
Delay time T1 after reaching the threshold s adjustable to 0.1 ... 3 ± 10 %
Availability time after application of Us ms max. 500
Measuring range inputs
• IN1-M
- sensitivity V 0.2 ... 2 15 ... 150
- input resistance kΩ 2 150
- overvoltage strength V 4 200
• IN2-M
- sensitivity V 1 ... 10 30 ... 300
• IN3-M
- input resistance
- overvoltage strength
kΩ 10
V 20
300
350 8
- sensitivity V 6 ... 60 60 ... 6001)
- input resistance kΩ 60 600
- overvoltage strength V 120 650
Function mode setting
• Overvoltage or undervoltage slide switch in lower part of unit
• With or without memory slide switch in lower part of unit
1) Observe rated insulation voltage.
Monitoring relays with internal power supply

Type 3UG35 34 3UG35 35
Rated control supply voltage Us V see Selection data
Voltage tolerance see Selection data, min./max. values
Frequency of the measuring-circuit voltage Hz 50/60 and DC
Threshold value Ue absolute scale for Ue absolute scale for Ue min and Ue max
Hysteresis % adjustable from 5 to 20 of the set fixed at 5 of the set threshold
threshold value
Setting accuracy % ± 10 referred to upper limit of measuring range
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters % 0.3
Delay time T1 after reaching the threshold s adjustable to 0.1 ... 3 ± 10 %
Measuring range inputs A1/A2:
• IN1-M
Min. sensitivity A see Selection data, measuring range of the corresponding version
Overvoltage strength V see Selection data, upper limit of rated control supply voltage
• Overvoltage or undervoltage slide switch fixed: overvoltage and undervolt-
age
• With or without memory slide switch fixed: without memory
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/53

Monitoring Relays
Phases and voltage:

Monitoring relays with external power supply Voltage monitoring relay, single-phase
• Overvoltage and/or undervoltage monitoring for DC and AC
Screw connection voltages
Mounting onto standard rail • 1 yellow LED for indicating the relay state
Width 22.5 mm • 1 green LED for indicating applied control supply voltage
Version Measuring range Ue Rated control supply voltage Us DT Order No. PS* Weight
AC/DC per PU
approx.
AC 50/60 Hz DC
V V V kg
electrical isola- 0.2 ... 60 (3 ranges) 24 A 3UG35 31-1AC20 1 unit 0.155
tion 120 D 3UG35 31-1AG20 1 unit 0.155
AC: yes 230 } 3UG35 31-1AL20 1 unit 0.157
DC: no 241) } 3UG35 31-1AC40 1 unit 0.115
adjustable 15 ... 600 (3 ranges) 24 } 3UG35 32-1AC20 1 unit 0.161
threshold and
120 } 3UG35 32-1AG20 1 unit 0.161
hysteresis
230 } 3UG35 32-1AL20 1 unit 0.159
241) } 3UG35 32-1AC40 1 unit 0.118
1) The rated control supply voltage and the measuring circuit are not electri-
cally isolated.
8 Monitoring relays with internal power supply

Screw connection
Voltage monitoring relay, single-phase
Absolute scale
For mounting onto standard rail • Overvoltage and/or undervoltage mode, depending upon ver-
Width 22.5 mm sion
• 3UG35 34:
1 yellow LED for indicating the relay state and 1 green LED for
indicating applied control supply voltage
• 3UG35 35:
1 yellow LED for indicating the relay state and 1 yellow LED
each for Umin and Umax;
Umin = flashing, Umax = off
Version Measuring range Rated control supply voltage DT Order No. PS* Weight
Ue Us per PU
AC/DC approx.
AC 50/60 Hz DC
V V V kg
Measuring-circuit volt- 20 ... 80 15 ... 150 15 ... 150 } 3UG35 34-1AC50 1 unit 0.107
age = control supply 65 ... 260 50 ... 275 50 ... 275 } 3UG35 34-1AM50 1 unit 0.107
voltage no adjustable
threshold and hysteresis
3UG35 34
Measuring-circuit volt- 20 ... 80 15 ... 150 15 ... 150 } 3UG35 35-1AC50 1 unit 0.108
age = control supply 65 ... 260 50 ... 275 50 ... 275 } 3UG35 35-1AM50 1 unit 0.107
voltage upper and lower
threshold value can be
adjusted separately
3UG35 35

Monitoring Relays
Phases and voltage:
Three-phase voltage monitoring
■ Functions
The output relay has tripped, provided that the values of the
three phase conductor voltages in the case of 3UG30 41 or the 1 N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 6 0 a
2
three star voltages of the phases with reference to the neutral L 1 /L 2
conductor in the case of 3UG30 42 lie between the lower and L 2 /L 3
L 1 /L 3
upper threshold. These are set separately on the front using two 2
3
potentiometers.
T 1
4
When the value of one voltage lies outside this range, the corre- T 2
sponding output relay will trip after elapse of a delay time T1 or 5
T2 that can be set separately on the front. 1 T h r e s h o ld v a lu e m a x

2 H y s te r e s is
A fixed hysteresis of 3% prevents the output relay from continu- 3 T h r e s h o ld v a lu e m in
ously switching on and off when the measuring-circuit voltage is 4 O u tp u t r e la y < m in
close to the threshold. ( te r m in a l 1 1 , 1 2 , 1 4 )
5 O u tp u t r e la y > m a x
The monitoring relay detects voltage feedback from running ( te r m in a l 2 1 , 2 2 , 2 4 )
drives up to the level of the set minimum threshold Umin.
The phase sequence is not monitored. The 3UG30 42 relay also
responds to failure of the neutral conductor.
Type 3UG30 41 3UG30 42
Rated control supply voltage Us V 400 phase conductor voltage 400 phase conductor voltage/
(L1/L2 also used to supply units) 230 star voltage
(L1/L2 also used to supply units)
Maximum power consumption
Frequency of the measuring-circuit voltage
W/VA 4/8
Hz 50/60
8
Threshold value Un min. 0.85 ... 0.98 × Un (340 ... 392 V phase/phase)
max. 1.02 ... 1.15 × Un (408 ... 460 V phase/phase)
Monitoring undervoltage and overvoltage failure undervoltage and overvoltage failure
L1/L2/L3 L1/L2/L3/N
Hysteresis fixed % up to 3 of the set threshold
Setting accuracy % ± 10
Delay time T1/T2 after reaching the threshold s adjustable to 0.1 ... 10; ± 50%
Response time on occurrence of a fault ms 500
Availability time after application of Us s 3

Screw connection Three-phase voltage monitoring relay with/without N conductor
• Upper and lower threshold value can be adjusted separately
For mounting onto standard rail and screw fixing • 1 changeover contact for undervoltage and 1 changeover con-
Width 45 mm tact for overvoltage
• 1 yellow LED each for indicating undervoltage or overvoltage
Version Measuring-circuit voltage Ue Rated control supply DT Order No. PS* Weight
AC 50/60 Hz voltage Us per PU
approx.
V V kg
3UG30 41 400 (phase to phase) 400 } 3UG30 41-1BP50 1 unit 0.313
Measuring-circuit voltage = con-
trol supply voltage; upper and
lower threshold can be adjusted
individually, hysteresis fixed
3UG30 42 400 (phase to phase) 400 } 3UG30 42-1BP50 1 unit 0.315

Measuring-circuit voltage = con- 230 (phase to N conductor) 230
trol supply voltage with monitor-
ing N conductor, upper and
lower threshold adjustment can
3UG30 41 be adjusted individually, hystere-
sis fixed

Monitoring Relays
Monitoring Relay for Electrical Variables
Current:
■ Functions
The relays monitor single-phase currents against the set thresh- Current monitoring with memory (MEMORY)
old. The products differ with regard to their measuring ranges
and voltage types. If the set threshold is reached, the output relay trips as soon as
the set time T1 has elapsed and it remains stored in this position
If the load on a motor changes, the motor current also changes. even when the measured current reaches the set hysteresis
This effect can be used to monitor loading on a motor by means value. The relay is reset by switching the supply voltage off and
of the current. Thus wear effects on tools, blocked loads, etc. are on again.
detected. It is also possible to check the functionality of load in A 1 /A 2 N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 6 3
this way. If current is flowing, the load is functioning. The relay
can also be used as a trigger for analog signals. 3
1
The latching/non-latching function can be set for the relay using 2
T 2 T 1 T 2 T 1
6
a DIP switch underneath the relay. It is also possible to set two 4
3
delay times. 2
1
T 2 T 1 T 2 T 1
6
5
Current monitoring without memory (NO MEMORY)
As soon as the value of the monitored AC or DC current reaches
the threshold set on the front, the output relay trips after the set 2 H y s te r e s is
time T1 has elapsed. The relay picks up immediately again when 3 M o n ito r e d m e a s u re d
the current reaches the hysteresis value again. c u rre n t
A 1 /A 2 N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 6 2
3
1 F u n c tio n U N D E R
2 6 S to ra g e
T 2 T 1 T 1 T 2
4
3 ON delay T1 and T2:
8 1
2
T 2 T 1 T 1 T 2
Due to the ON delay T2, current peaks (OVER function) or cur-
rent falls (UNDER function), that can occur when switching on,
5
do not cause a change in relay status, e.g. for suppression of the
inrush current on motor starting. The delay time T1 prevents the
2 H y s te r e s is
relay from continuously switching on and off when the measured
3 M o n ito r e d m e a s u re d current is close to the set threshold.
c u rre n t
4 O u tp u t r e la y Note:
F u n c tio n O V E R Please see the connection diagrams and notes under General
5 O u tp u t r e la y data, circuit diagrams.
8/56 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Monitoring Relays
Current:
Type 3UG35 21 3UG35 22
Frequency of the measured current Hz 40 ... 500 and DC
Threshold Ie % adjustable to 10 ...100 of the selected effective range
Hysteresis % adjustable from 5 to 50 of the set threshold value
Setting accuracy1) % ± 10 referred to upper limit of effective range
Deviations at voltage fluctuations % ≤ 0.5
with temperature fluctuations %/°C ± 0.05
Delay time T2, ON-delay s 1 ... 20 ± 10%
T1 after reaching the threshold s 0.1 ... 3 ± 10%
Effective range inputs
• IN1-M
- sensitivity A 0.002 ... 0.02 0.1 ... 1
- input resistance Ω 5 0.1
- overvoltage strength, continuous A 0.04 2
- overvoltage strength < 1 s A 1 17
• IN2-M
- sensitivity A 0.01 ... 0.1 0.5 ... 5
- input resistance Ω 1 0.02
- overvoltage strength, continuous A 0.2 10
• IN3-M
- sensitivity A 0.05 ... 0.5 1 ... 102)
- input resistance
- overvoltage strength, continuous
Ω
A
0.2
1
0.01
13
8
Max. voltage in monitoring circuit and AC V 480
permissible potential difference DC V 300
• overcurrent and undercurrent slide switch in lower part of unit
• with or without memory slide switch in lower part of unit
1) With sinusoidal currents. Measuring principle: arithmetic mean-value gen- 2) For continuous currents of 10 A and devices mounted side by side, the
eration. ambient temperature must not exceed +40 °C.

Screw-type connection Current monitoring relay, single-phase
• Overvoltage and undervoltage monitoring of DC and AC volt-
For mounting onto standard rail or screw fixing ages
Width 22.5 mm • 1 yellow LED for indicating the relay state
Version Effective range Ue Rated control supply volt- DT Order No. PS* Weight
AC/DC age Us per PU
AC 50/60 Hz DC approx.
A V kg
electrical isolation 0.002 ... 0.5 (3 ranges) 24 } 3UG35 21-1AC20 1 unit 0.273
AC: yes 120 A 3UG35 21-1AG20 1 unit 0.157
DC: no 230 } 3UG35 21-1AL20 1 unit 0.157
adjustable threshold 241) } 3UG35 21-1AC40 1 unit 0.118
and hysteresis 0.1 ... 10 (3 ranges) 24 } 3UG35 22-1AC20 1 unit 0.158
120 } 3UG35 22-1AG20 1 unit 0.156
230 } 3UG35 22-1AL20 1 unit 0.158
241) } 3UG35 22-1AC40 1 unit 0.117
cally isolated, see also Page 8/46.

Monitoring Relays
Power factor monitoring
(motor load monitoring)
■ Functions
The 3UG30 14 monitoring relay is used for monitoring the load of Note:
motors by measuring the phase angle between voltage and cur-
rent, i.e. the power factor. The output relays respond as long as Power factor monitoring relays are connected in series after the
the power factor lies between the upper and lower thresh- motor contactor to ensure that the delay time for bridging start-
olds.These are set separately on the front using two potentio- up elapses after switch-on. For this reason, the output relay must
meters. not be connected in series with the supply voltage of the motor
contactor, otherwise it would not be possible to switch on the
load feeder.
When the value of the power factor lies outside this range, the N S B 0 _ 0 1 1 2 9
1
corresponding output relay will drop after a delay time T1 that 2
can be set on the front has elapsed. A fixed hysteresis prevents
the output relay from continuously switching on and off when the 2
measured value is close to the threshold. The ON delay T2 can 3
be used to suppress the effects of motor start-up. c o s

T 2 T 1
4
Important! 5
T 1
It is important to ensure that the phases are connected in the 1 T h r e s h o ld v a lu e m a x

correct sequence L1-L2-L3, otherwise the power factor will be 2 H y s te r e s is
evaluated incorrectly. 3 T h r e s h o ld v a lu e m in
4 O u tp u t r e la y c o s > c o s m a x
( te r m in a ls 2 1 , 2 2 , 2 4 )
5 O u tp u t r e la y c o s < c o s m in
( te r m in a ls 1 1 , 1 2 , 1 4 )
8 Voltage tolerance V 0.85 ...1.15 × Us
Maximum power consumption VA 3
Frequency of the monitored line Hz 50 ... 60
Effective range of power factor 0.1 ... 0.99 for lower and upper threshold
Hysteresis fixed % 10 for p.f. ≤ 0.4
10 ... 30 for p.f. < 0.4
Setting accuracy % ± 10 referred to upper limit of effective range
Deviations for temperature deviations % ± 0.05/ K
Delay time s 0.5 ... 20 ; ± 20%
• T2, ON-delay s 0.3 ... 3 ; ± 20%
• T1 after reaching the threshold
Input circuit
• Current range A 0.5 ... 10
• Peak current (< 1 s) A 50
• Input resistance L1/L2/L3 kΩ 2
• Input resistance current, IN1 Ω 0.02
Note: currents > 10 A only with current converter.

Screw connection Relay for power factor monitoring, single and three-phase
• monitoring of the power factor for undershoot/overshoot for
For mounting onto standard rail and screw fixing motor underload and overload
Assembly width 45 mm • upper and lower threshold value can be adjusted separately
• 1 changeover contact each for undershoot/overshoot
• 1 yellow LED each for indicating of undershoot/overshoot
• 1 green LED for indicating the applied control supply voltage
flashes with 1 Hz, during the operating time T1
flashes with 2 Hz, if p.f.min ≥ p.f.max
Version Measuring range Rated control supply DT Order No. PS* Weight
Ue voltage Us per PU
Phase conductor volt- approx.
age
AC 50/60 Hz
p.f. V kg
Measured voltage = 0.1 ... 0,99 3 × 230 B 3UG30 14-1BL60 1 unit 0.311
control supply voltage 3 × 400 } 3UG30 14-1BP60 1 unit 0.308
3 × 480 B 3UG30 14-1BR60 1 unit 0.355
3 × 575 B 3UG30 14-1BS60 1 unit 0.350
3UG30 14

Monitoring Relays
for ungrounded AC voltage networks
■ Overview Test functions

The "Test" button on the front can be used to simulate a ground
• Relay for monitoring the isolation resistance between the un-
fault. If the "Test" button is pressed for at least 300 ms, the output
grounded single or three-phase AC supply and a protective
relay is energized and the fault LED lights up. An external test
ground conductor
button can be connected to terminals Y1 and Y2. The function is
• Measuring principle with superimposed DC voltage activated through a normally-open contact.
• Two selectable measuring ranges of 1 ... 110 kΩ
• Stepless setting within the measuring range
Storage of the fault
• Selectable:
- Auto reset function with fixed hysteresis or If terminals Y1 and Y2 are jumpered, the monitoring relay is set
- Storage of the tripping operation to fault storage mode. If the set isolation resistance is undershot,
• Test function with test button and terminal connections on the the output relay is excited and remains tripped even after the iso-
front lation resistance rises above 1.6 times the set value again. Fault
storage can be reset by briefly pressing the RESET button,
• Switching output: 1 changeover contact briefly jumpering the Y1 and PE/ground terminals or by switch-
• Isolation fault indication with a red LED ing off the supply voltage.
• Supply voltage indication with a green LED
• Electro-magnetically compatible according to EN 61000-6-4 Note:
and EN 61000-6-2
The monitoring relay is designed for AC supply systems. Series-
connected rectifiers must be galvanically isolated from the mea-
suring relay that is to be monitored.
The 3UG30 81 monitoring relay is suitable for isolation monitor- N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 9 3
ing of AC systems with one or three phases in ungrounded net- 1 A 1 /A 2 1 = S u p p ly v o lta g e
A 1 /B 2
A 1 -B 2 /A 1 -A 2 fo r
works (IT networks). 2 Y 1 /Y 2
A C 1 1 5 V /2 3 0 V
3 Y 1 /P E
2 =
A 1 -A 2 fo r A C /D C
R e m o te c o n n e c tio
s a v e -re s e t
2 4 ... 2 4 0 V
n - 8
Supply voltage 1 . 6 x R v a lu e 3 = K e y o n th e fro n t -
4 R
te s t/re s e t
The 3UG30 81-1AK20 has alternative voltage terminals. Only R v a lu e 4 = In s u la tio n r e s is ta n c e R
one supply voltage is permitted to be connected to it! Terminals o f n e tw o rk
5 1 1 /1 4 S e t o p e r a tin g v a lu e R
A1 and A2 are used to connect AC 230 V and terminals A1 and 1 1 /1 2
5 = N O c o n ta c t
B2 are used to connect AC 115 V. T e s t
T e s t = > a p p ro x . 3 0 0 m s
The 3UG30 81-1AW30 has a wide-range input of AC/DC 24 V to
240 V on terminals A1 and A2.
■ Functions
The monitoring relay measures the isolation resistance between
the ungrounded AC supply and an associated protective ground
conductor.
A superposed DC measuring voltage is used to perform the
measurement.
The monitoring relay is divided into two ranges for an isolation re-
sistance range from 1 to 100 kΩ. A range switch on the front can
be used to switch over between a 1 to 11 kΩ range and a
10 to 110 kΩ range. Within the selected range, the monitoring
relay can be steplessly adapted to the respective isolation con-
ditions.
If the isolation resistance undershoots the set threshold, the out-
put relay is excited and the red LED (fault display) is lit.
If the isolation resistance exceeds 1.6 times (corresponding to
60 % hysteresis) the set threshold, the output relay will return to
the rest position.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/59

Monitoring Relays
for ungrounded AC voltage networks
3UG30 81
Control circuit
Operating range of the control supply voltage – 15 % ... + 10 %
Rated power AC/DC 24 ... 240 V VA/W 8/2
AC 110/130 V VA 3
AC 220 ... 240 V VA 3
Frequency of the rated control supply voltage Hz 50 ... 60
Measurement circuit L/PE/ground
• Response value kΩ 1 ... 110
• Minimum internal resistance for AC kΩ 100
• Minimum internal resistance for DC kΩ 100
• DC measurement voltage V DC30
• Insulation voltage V AC 415
• Reset/test function terminals Y1-Y2
• Maximum cable length m 10
• ON-delay s 1
Output relay 1 changeover contact,
open-circuit principle
General data
Rated insulation voltage Ui between supply, measurement, and V 400 acc. to IEC 60947-1
output circuit
Overvoltage category acc. to IEC 60664 III
Pollution degree acc. to IEC 60664 3
8 Rated impulse withstand voltage

Uimp
Degree of protection
acc. to VDE 0435, Part 303
acc. to EN 60529
kV 4
IP50 enclosure, IP20 terminals

Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 10
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 10–55/0.35
Permissible ambient temperature
• during operation °C – 25 ... 65
• during storage °C – 40 ... 85
Conductor cross-section solid mm2 2 × 0.75 ... 2.5
finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × 0.75 ... 2.5

Effective range Ue Rated control supply voltage Us DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.
kΩ V kg
Isolation monitors for ungrounded AC networks
10 ... 110 AC 115/ 230 A 3UG30 81-1AK20 1 unit 0.327
10 ... 110 AC/DC 24 ... 240 A 3UG30 81-1AW30 1 unit 0.242
Accessories
sealable, transparent cover A 3UG32 08-1A 1 unit 0.010

Monitoring Relays
for ungrounded DC voltage networks
■ Overview Test function

A ground fault can be simulated using the Test L+ and Test L-
• Relay for monitoring the isolation resistance between un-
buttons on the front. If the test button is pressed for at least 1 s,
grounded purely DC networks and a protective-ground con-
the status of the output relay changes and the corresponding
ductor
fault LED lights up.
• Measuring principle for differential current measurement
An external test button can be connected to terminals Y1-Y3 for
• Response threshold can be set continuously from 10 to 110 kΩ L+ and terminals Y4-Y3 for L-. The function is triggered by
• Selectable means of a NO contact.
- Auto reset function with hysteresis or
- Storage of the tripping operation
• Front selector switch for open-circuit and closed-circuit princi- Storage of the fault
ple for the output relay
If terminals Y1 and Y2 are linked, the monitoring relay is set to
• Test function with test buttons on the front for L+ and L- fault storage mode.
and over terminal connections
If the insulation resistance falls below the set value, the output re-
• Switching output: 1 changeover contact lay triggers (depending on the setting of the open/closed circuit
• Isolation fault indicator for L+ and L- through two red LEDs selector switch), and stays in this state even if the insulation re-
• Supply voltage indication with a green LED sistance rises again above the hysteresis value (typical: 2 times
the set value). This fault storage can be deleted by pressing and
• Electro-magnetically compatible according to EN 61000-6-4 releasing the L+ RESET button, opening the Y2-Y3 connection or
and EN 61000-6-2 by switching off the supply voltage.
■ Area of application Open/closed-circuit principle selector switch

The function principle of the output relay can be adjusted by
The 3UG30 82 monitoring relay has been designed for isolation
means of a selector switch on the front panel.
monitoring in ungrounded, purely DC networks with or without fil-
tering.
It is mainly used to monitor ungrounded DC voltage networks as
If the relay is to respond in the event of a fault (contact symbol
open), the open-circuit principle must be selected. If the relay 8
well as to monitor battery-powered systems. however is to trigger in the event of a fault (contact symbol
closed), the closed-circuit principle must be selected.
Supply voltage Note:
Due to the electrical isolation of the supply voltage and the mea- The position of the selector switch has no effect upon the fault
surement circuit, the relay can be used for DC networks in which LEDs. The LEDs always light up if the insulation resistance on L+
the auxiliary voltage is either supplied externally or where the or L– falls below the set value.
network to be monitored also serves as the power supply.
Note:
N S B 0 _ 0 1 3 9 5
1 = S u p p ly v o lta g e
1 A 1 /A 2
If the monitoring relay is supplied with an AC 230 V voltage, for 2 = B u tto n o n fro n t -
2
example, the terminals A1 and L+ as well as A2 and L– must not 3 Y 3 /Y 4 R e s e t L + a n d L - /
be connected with each other! 4 Y 1 /Y 3 T e s t L +
5 Y 2 /Y 3 3 = B u tto n o n fro n t - T e s t L -
L + /P E R R H y s t T e s t r e m o te c o n n e c tio n -
■ Functions 6 L -/P E
O p e n -
c ir c u it /
R v a lu e
4
T e s t L -
= T e s t r e m o te c o n n e c tio n -
c lo s e d -
T e s t L +
The monitoring relay measures the insulation voltage between 7 c ir c u it 5 = T e s t r e m o te c o n n e c tio n -
p r in c ip le
the positive and negative supply voltage in an ungrounded DC 1 1 /1 4
S to re , re s e t
8 6 = In s u la tio n r e s is ta n c e R
voltage network and a corresponding protective conductor. 1 1 /1 2
T e s t > s o f s u p p ly
s e t r e s p o n s e v a lu e R
T e s t = a p p ro x . 1 s 7 = S w itc h o n fr o n t
The measurement is based on the DC residual current measure- R H y s t = ty p ic a lly 2 x R x O p e n - c ir c u it /
ment principle. c lo s e d - c ir c u it p r in c ip le
The response value can be adjusted steplessly in the range from 8 = N O c o n ta c t
10...110 kΩ and thus can be adapted to the corresponding con-
ditions. If the insulation resistance falls below the set response
value, the output relay triggers (depending on the setting of the
open/closed-circuit principle selector switch) and a fault LED
lights up.
A ground fault is evaluated separately for L+ and L- and indi-
cated by means of a corresponding LED.
Note:
Due to the measurement principle, a symmetrical ground fault on
terminals L+ and L- cannot be evaluated.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/61

Monitoring Relays
for ungrounded DC voltage networks
3UG30 82
Control circuit
Operating range of the control supply voltage – 15 % ... + 10 %
Rated power AC/DC 24 ... 240 V V VA/W 8/2
Frequency of the rated control supply voltage Hz 50 ... 60
Measurement circuit
• response value kΩ 10 ... 110
• minimum internal resistance for DC kΩ 57
• measurement DC voltage V 24 ... 240
• max. DC insulation voltage (L+/PE/ground, L-/PE/ground) DC V 300
• reset/test function terminals Y1/Y3, Y4/Y3
• maximum cable length m 10
• ON-delay s 1
Output relay 1 changeover contact, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle
General data
Rated insulation voltage Ui between supply, measurement, and V 400
output circuit
Overvoltage category acc. to IEC 60664 III
Pollution degree acc. to IEC 60664 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage acc. to VDE 0435, Part 303 V 4000
Uimp
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 IP50 enclosure, IP20 terminals
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 10
8 Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/ 10-55/0.35

mm
• during operation °C – 25 ... + 65
• during storage °C – 40 ... + 85
Conductor cross-section solid mm2 2 × 0.75 ... 2.5
finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × 0.75 ... 2.5

Effective range Ue Rated control supply voltage DT Order No. PS* Weight
Us per PU
approx.
kΩ V kg
Isolation monitors for ungrounded DC networks
10 ... 110 AC/DC 24 ... 240 V A 3UG30 82-1AW30 1 unit 0.241
Accessories
sealable, transparent cover A 3UG32 08-1A 1 unit 0.010

Monitoring Relays
Other Monitoring Relays
General data

Electronic monitoring relays are offered in the well-proven de- Relays for level control are used for single-point and two-point
sign with different functions. These relays are used to detect level control. With a resistance measurement in the fluid, the lim-
wear effects and potential faults at an early stage and to respond its determined by the probe are monitored and the output relay
to them before more serious secondary damage can occur. With is switched. A range of probes that have been optimized for tank
their minimal space requirements, high measuring accuracy and level monitoring are available as accessories.
optimized functions for high reliability, they are easy to use.
The relay for speed falls below monitoring is particularly suited
to checking belt slip or tears.
In addition, any continuous pulse signal can be monitored, e.g.
for checking smooth running of a belt, monitoring cycle times or
as a watchdog for a control.
■ Technical data
Type 3UG30/3UG35
Load capacity of the output relay rated operating current Ie A max. 8
AC-15/230 V A 3
DC-13/24 V A 1
DC-13/48 V A 0.45
DC-13/60 V A 0.35
DC-13/110 V A 0.2
DC-13/230 V A 0.1
Minimum contact load mA 5/17 V for a fault of 1 ppm
Output relay, DIAZED fuse1) Operational class gl/Gg A 4
Electrical endurance Operating cycles 1 × 105
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 2 × 106
Ambient temperature during operation °C – 20 ... + 50
Conductor connection
during storage
solid
°C – 30 ... + 70
mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
8
finely stranded, mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)
with end sleeve
Degree of protection Terminals IP20
Enclosure IP40
Can be used in networks 3UG30 13/3UG35 11 AC V 660
other 3UG3 AC V 480
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 10 ... 55/0.35
Note:
Fuse protection of the measurement circuit is not required to pro-
tect the device. Conductor protection depends on the conductor
cross-section used.
1) Short-circuits without contact welding to EN 60947-5-1.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/63

Monitoring Relays
Fill level
■ Functions Note:
It is also possible to connect other resistance sensors to the Min
The principle of operation is based on measuring the electrical and Max terminals in the range 5 ... 100 kΩ e.g. photoresistors,
resistance of the liquid between two immersion sensors and a temperature sensors, encoders based on resistance etc.
reference terminal. If the measured value is lower than the sen- The monitoring relay can therefore also be used for other appli-
sitivity set at the front, the output relay changes its switching cations apart from monitoring the levels of conductive liquids.
state. In order to exclude electrolytic phenomena in the liquid,
the sensors are supplied with alternating current.
Two-level control: the output relay changes its switching state as A 1 /A 2 N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 6 1
soon as the liquid level reaches the maximum sensor, while the
T 3
minimum sensor is submerged. The relay returns to its original 3
switching state as soon as the minimum sensor no longer has 1
contact with the liquid. 2
For safe resetting, the supply voltage must be interrupted for at

4
least 0.5 s (T3).
5
The delay times T1 and T2 of the output relay have not been in-
cluded in the diagram in order to enhance clarity. 1 M a x im u m le v e l 1)
2 M in im u m le v e l 1)
3 M o n ito r e d le v e l
1 ) D e te r m in e d b y th e a r r a n g e m e n t
o f th e p r o b e s in th e m o n ito r e d liq u id .
8 Rated control supply voltage Us V see Selection data (electrical isolation by means of a transformer)
Voltage tolerance 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
Function Inlet or outlet monitoring UNDER/OVER slide switch at the front
Sensitivity adjustable kΩ 5 ... 100
Setting accuracy at maximum sensitivity % ± 30
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters % ±1
Sensor length max. m 100
Electrode voltage max. V 24 (50/60 Hz)
Electrode current max. mA 1 (50/60 Hz)
Conductor capacity of the sensor cable1) nF 10
Delay time
• T1 at Max/M terminal ms typically 500 (ON-delay with OVER, OFF-delay with UNDER)
• T2 at MIN/M terminal ms typically 300 (OFF-delay with OVER, ON-delay with UNDER)
1) The sensor cable need not necessarily be shielded, but it is not recom-
mended to lay this cable parallel to the power supply lines. It is also possi-
ble to use a shielded cable, whereby the shield has to be connected to the
M terminal.

Screw connection Level monitoring relay for conductive liquids
• inlet or outlet monitoring adjustable
Standard rail mounting • sensitivity adjustment by potentiometer
Width 22.5 mm • 1 yellow LED for indicating the relay state
Design Sensitivity Rated control supply DT Order No. PS* Weight
voltage Us per PU
AC 50/60 Hz approx.
kΩ V kg
Inlet or outlet monitoring 5 ... 100 24 } 3UG35 01-1AC20 1 unit 0.143
(UNDER/OVER function) adjustable 120 } 3UG35 01-1AG20 1 unit 0.142
230 } 3UG35 01-1AL20 1 unit 0.144

Monitoring Relays
Fill level
■ Accessories
Sensors for level monitoring
Version Assignment Application DT Order No. PS* Weight
Cable Electrode per PU
approx.
kg
Three-pole wire elec- brown center The electrodes can be cut } 3UG32 07-3A 1 unit 0.254
trode, 500 mm long, electrode or bent to the required
with Teflon insulation white not assign- length before or after
(PTFE), screw-in gland green able installation. The Teflon
width A/F 22, insulation must be
3/8 inch thread, PVC removed over a length of
connecting cable, approx. 5 mm. Application:
3 × 0.5 mm2, 2 m long, for 2-point liquid level con-
max. operating temper- trol in an insulating tank.
ature 90 °C, max. oper- One electrode each for the
ating pressure 10 bar min. and max. value and a
common reference elec-
trode.
Two-pole wire electrode, brown not assign- For installation, } 3UG32 07-2A 1 unit 0.230
500 mm long, with white able see 3UG32 07-3A
Teflon insulation (PTFE), Application: for alarm indi-
screw-in gland width cation in the event of over-
A/F 22 mm, flow or low level and for 2-
3/8 inch thread, PVC step liquid-level control,
connecting cable, when the conductive tank
3 × 0.5 mm2, 2 m long, is used as the reference
max. operating temper- electrode.
ature 90 °C, max. oper-
ating pressure 10 bar
Two-pole bow electrode, brown
500 mm long, with white
gland Thanks to the small space }
not assign- requirements due to lateral
3UG32 07-2B 1 unit 0.128 8
Teflon insulation (PTFE), green able fitting, ideal for use in small
screw-in gland width containers and pipes, as a
A/F 22 mm, leak monitor and level
3/8 inch thread, PVC monitor or for warning of
connecting cable, water entering an enclo-
3 × 0.5 mm2, 2 m long, sure.
max. operating temper-
Single-pole bow elec- brown gland As a max. value electrode } 3UG32 07-1B 1 unit 0.122
trode for lateral fitting, white electrode for lateral fitting or for
screw-in gland width alarm indication in conduc-
A/F 22, tive tanks or pipes.
3/8 inch thread, PVC
connecting lead,
3 × 0.5 mm2, 2 m long,
Single-pole bow elec- brown gland For high flow velocities or A 3UG32 07-1C 1 unit 0.144
trode for lateral fitting, white electrode for alarm indication in con-
500 mm long, with ductive tanks or pipes.
Teflon insulation (PTFE),
screw-in gland width
A/F 22,
3/8 inch thread, PVC
connecting cable,
3 × 0.5 mm2, 2 m long,

Monitoring Relays
Speed
■ Functions
The underspeed monitoring relay operates according to the Speed monitoring with memory (MEMORY)
principle of retriggerable OFF-delay.
During the time (value) set on the front panel, another pulse must When the output relay drops, this state remains stored even
arrive at input IN1 or IN2 to ensure that the output relay remains when the speed reaches a permissible value again. The stored
picked up. The monitoring relay evaluates the rising edge of the state can be ended by a control signal at the reset terminal or by
signal, i.e. a continuous signal is also recognized as a missing interrupting the supply voltage for at least 200 ms.
pulse. If the retrigger pulse does not arrive, indicating a reduc- A 1 /A 2 N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 6 6
tion in speed, the output relay drops. In order to be able to start
a drive, the output relay remains picked up during the ON-delay 5
3
time T, even if the speed is still below the set value (motor start- 2
1
ing override time).
T T
The monitoring relay can be used for all functions where a con-
4
tinuous pulse signal needs to be monitored (belt travel monitor-
ing, completeness monitoring, passing monitoring, clock-time 6 6
monitoring).
1 S e t v a lu e
Speed monitoring without memory (NO MEMORY) 2 H y s te r e s is
3 A c tu a l v a lu e
When the speed of the drive drops below the set value, the out- 4 O u tp u t r e la y
put relay drops. It picks up again when the speed is greater than 5 R e s e t
the set value plus the fixed hysteresis. 6 S to ra g e (M E M O R Y )
A 1 /A 2 N S B 0 _ 0 0 9 6 5
3
2
1
8 4
T
1 S e t v a lu e
2 H y s te r e s is
3 A c tu a l v a lu e
8/66 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Monitoring Relays
Speed
Type 3UG30 51
Set value % adjustable to 10 ...100 of the selected time setting range
Hysteresis % typically 5 of the set value
Setting accuracy % 10 referred to upper limit of time setting range
Deviations with temperature fluctuations %/°C 0.1
ON-delay T s adjustable to 0.3 ... 30 ± 10%
Signal input IN11) (input resistance16 kΩ) V max. voltage 30, 3-wire sensor, pnp operation
Signal input IN21) (input resistance 1 kΩ) floating contact, 2-wire NAMUR sensor
Voltage level for reliable operation level 1 V 4.5 ... 30
level 0 V 0 ... 1
Sensor supply +24 V/0 V mA max. 50 at DC 24 V (20 ... 35 V)
+8 V2 mA 1 DC 8.2 V
Measuring range,
selectable (rotary switch on front)
time setting range
• 0.1 ... 1 s - frequency Hz 10 ... 1
- revolutions min–1 600 ... 60
• 1 ... 10 s - frequency Hz 1 ... 0.1
- revolutions min–1 60 ... 6
• 0.1 ... 1 min - frequency Hz 0.17 ... 0.017
• 1 ... 10 min
- revolutions
- frequency
min–1 10 ... 1
Hz 0.017 ... 0.0017
8
- revolutions min–1 1 ... 0.1
- minimum pulse duration of signal ms 5
- minimum interval between 2 pulses ms 5
Function mode setting With or without memory rotary switch on front panel
Availability time after application of Us ms 200
1) The sensors are not included in the scope of supply.

Screw-type connection Underspeed monitoring relay
• 4 measuring ranges adjustable on front panel
For snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail and • 1 green LED for indicating applied control supply voltage
screw fixing • 1 yellow LED for indicating the relay state, flashes during oper-
Assembly width 45 mm ating time T
Version Measuring range Rated control supply voltage DT Order No. PS* Weight
Us per PU
AC 50/60 Hz DC approx.
revolutions/min–1 V kg
Measuring range with 0.1 ... 600 (4 ranges) 24 } 3UG30 51-1AC20 1 unit 0.273
or without memory, 120 } 3UG30 51-1AG20 1 unit 0.274
start-up override 230 } 3UG30 51-1AL20 1 unit 0.272
0.3 ... 30 s, electrical 241) } 3UG30 51-1AC40 1 unit 0.161
isolation
AC: yes
DC: no
cally isolated.

Coupling Relays and Converters
Coupling Relays with Narrow Type of Construction
General data
Relay connectors – connection diagrams
Terminal designations acc. to EN 50005
3TX7 002-.A.00 -1B.00 -1CB00 -1FB02 -2BF02
3TX7 002-1AB02
3TX7 002-2AF05
3TX7 003-.A.00 -1B.00 1CB00
A1 13 A1 11 A1 A1 13 23 A1 11 21 11
A1
NSB00188 NSB00189 NSB00191a

NSB00190 NSB00192
A2 14 A2 A2 12 14 A2 A2 14 24 A2 12 14 22 24 12 14
A2
Relay connectors – position of the terminals

Output interfaces Input interfaces
3TX7 002-1AB0. -1B.00 -1CB00 -1FB02 3TX7 002-2A.0. -2BF02
3TX7 003-1AB00 -1B.00 -1CB00 3TX7 003-2A.0.
A1 A2 A1 A2 A2 A1A1 A2 A2 A1 A2 12 11 13 14 12 14 11
8
NSB00197
NSB00198
NSB00201
NSB00202
NSB00199
NSB00200
13 14 11 12 14 13 14 23 24 21 24 22 14 A1 A2 A1 A2
Relay connectors – connection diagrams

Output interfaces
3TX7 00.-1M.00 3TX7 00.-1AB10 3TX7 00.-1BB00 3TX7 00.-1L.0.
3TX7 00.-1BF05
A1 A
0
A1 A1 12
M
14 A1 14
A1 12
A2 14 14 A2
A3 14
13 A2 11
NSB00205 A2 NSB00208
A2 11
A2 13 NSB00207 11
NSB00206 13
3TX7 00.-1BB10 3TX7 00.-1CB00 3TX7 00.-1HB00 3TX7 00.-1GB00

A
0 A11 A11 A11
M
114 114
A1 A11 112
12 114
A3 14 113 113
A21
A2 A21
214 111
214 A21
A2 11 111
NSB00209 11 A2 A21 212
213
213 A31 214
A2 NSB00210 314 A2
A2
A2 211
A2 313 NSB00212 211
NSB00211
A2
A2
A2
Input interfaces
3TX7 00.-2M.02
A1
14
A2 A = automatic
13 0 = neutral position
NSB00213 M = manual
8/68 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

General data
Relay connectors – position of the terminals
3TX7 004 3TX7 004-2M...
-1M.00 -1L.0. -1AB10 -1B.0. -1BB10 -1CB00 -1HB00 -1GB00
-A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 13
+A1 A1 A1 A3 A1 A1 A1 A3 A11 A21 A11 A21 A31 A11 A11 A21 A21 14
12
11
14 112 114 212 214 A1
NSB00286
NSB00224
NSB00225
14 14 14 12 14 12 14 114 214 114 214 314
NSB00285
NSB00220
NSB00221
NSB00222
NSB00287
NSB00223
13 13 13 11 11 11 11 113 213 113 213 313 111 111 211 211 A2
3TX7 005 3TX7 005-2M...

-1M.00 -1L.0. -1AB10 -1BB00 -1BB10 -1CB00 -1HB00 -1GB00
-A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 13
+A1 A1 A1 A3 A1 A1 A11 A21 A11 A21 A11 A11 A21 A21 A11 A11 A21 A21 14
12
11
14 14 14 112 114 212 214 112 114 212 214 A1
NSB00232
NSB00233
NSB00228
14 114 214 114 214
NSB00234
12 14
NSB00226
NSB00230
NSB00231
NSB00227
NSB00229
13 13 13 11 11 113 213 113 213 111 111 211 211 111 111 211 211 A2
Semiconductor interfaces – connection diagrams

Terminal designations acc. to EN 50005
3TX7 002-3AB00 -3AB01 -4AB00 -4AG00
A1 13 A1 13 A1 13 A1 13 8
NSB00193
NSB00195 NSB00196
NSB00194
A2 14 A2 14 A2 14
A2 14
Semiconductor interfaces – position of the interfaces

3TX7 002-3AB0. 3TX7 002-4A.0.
A1 A2 A1 A2 A2
NSB00197
NSB00198
13 14 11 12 14
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/69

General data
Semiconductor interfaces – connection diagrams
Output interfaces
3TX7 00.-3AB04 3TX7 00.-3PB54 3TX7 00.-3AC04
3TX7 00.-3PB41 3TX7 00.-3PG74
3TX7 00.-3PB74
A1 A1 A1
+13 +13 + A1 +13
A2 A2 +13 +
14 14 A2
NSB00214 NSB00215 Last
Last 0V _ A2 14
NSB00216 Last
_
0V
3TX7 00.-3AC14 3TX07 00.-3AC03 3TX7 00.-3RB43

A
0 A1 A1
M
~13
A1 A1 ~13
+13 A2
~13
A3 +13 +
A2 ~14
A2 NSB01099
A2 ~14
A2 14 NSB00218
~14 Last
NSB00217 Last
_
0V
Last
Input interfaces
3TX7 00.-4AB04
3TX7 00.-4P.24
A1
8 A2
+13
14
NSB00219
Last
Semiconductor interfaces – position of the interfaces

3TX7 004 3TX7 004-4AB04
-3AB04, -3PB54, -3AC04 -3AC14 -3AC03 -3RB43 3TX7 004-4P.24
-3PB41 -3PB74,
-3PG74
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 +13
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A3 A1 A1 A1 14
+13
14
14 0V 14 0V 14 14 14 A1
NSB00235
NSB00238
NSB01100
NSB00240
NSB00239
14 0V
NSB00236
NSB00237
+13 +13 +13 +13 +13 13 13 13 A2
3TX7 005 3TX7 005-4AB04

-3AB04, -3PB54, -3AC04 -3AC14 -3AC03 -3RB43 3TX7 005-4P.24
-3PB41 -3PB74,
-3PG74
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 +13
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A3 A1 A1 A1 14
+13
14
0V 14 0V 14 0V 14 14
NSB00244
NSB00245
14 A1
NSB00243
14
NSB00242
NSB00241
NSB01101
NSB00246
+13 +13 +13 +13 +13 13 13 13 A2
A = automatic
0 = neutral position
M = manual
8/70 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Relay connectors
AC and DC operation Surge suppression
DIN VDE 0110 Part 1, DIN VDE 0435, DIN VDE 0660 and The coupling links have been tested with 1 x 105 operating cy-
EN 50005 cles at AC-15 operation with the values specified in the Techni-
cal specifications.
In the coupling elements in double-decker format, the connec-
tions are arranged on two levels; the units are extremely com- If inductive loads are connected, the service life of the relay con-
pact. Connection method: screw-type connection or spring- nectors can be increased.
loaded terminal. For test purposes, versions are available with
manual 0 automatic switches.
The input and output coupling elements differ with regard to the Note:
positioning of the terminals and the LEDs. For equipment identi- If capacitive loads without series resistors are switched, which
fication purposes, each coupling element has a blank legend limit temporary peak currents, microscopic welding of the relay
plate. contacts may result.
In accordance with the technical specifications of electronic sys-
tems, the coupling elements have a lower power consumption.
■ Design
Note on mounting
Snap-on mounting is possible on horizontal and vertical rails. In
the case of vertical rails and closely mounted units, the maxi-
mum permissible ambient temperature Tu = 40 °C. Any service
position is possible.
If the coupling elements are operated continuously 24 hours per
day (100% ON time) at the maximum permissible rated control
8
supply voltage and the maximum permissible ambient tempera-
ture, it is recommended that no similar equipment or other units
that generate heat are placed directly adjoining the coupling el-
ements because this can reduce the service life of the couplers.
A clearance of > 10 mm to the right and left of the coupling ele- Connecting a lead to the spring-loaded terminals
ment reduces the risk of a premature failure under these condi-
tions of application.
Peripheral
devices Electronic control Actuators
AC 110 V AC 110 V
AC 230 V DC 24 V DC 24 V AC 230 V
Output
Input
M
Pushbuttons Interface Interface Motor
Position switches NSB00186
contactor
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/71

Relay connectors
Type 3TX7 002-/3TX7 003-
General data
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 300
Safe isolation 1) V up to AC 300 V
between the coil and the contacts acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101
Degree of protection Connections IP20
Enclosures IP30
Short-circuit protection acc. to IEC 60947-5-1 A 4
(weld-free protection at Ik ≥ 1 kA)
Fuse-links, operational class gL/gG
Permissible ambient temperature during operation °C –25 ... +60
during storage °C –40 ... +80
• Screw-type connections
- solid mm2 1 × (0.25 ... 4)
- finely stranded with or without end sleeve mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
- terminal screw M3
• Spring-loaded terminals (for 3TX7 003):
- solid or finely stranded mm2 1 × (0.08 ... 2.5)
- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
1) For 3TX7 00.-1FB02, no safe isolation acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101.
Type 3TX7 002-/3TX7 003- 1AB02 1AB00 1BB00 1CB00 2AB00 2AE00 1BF00 2AF00 2AF05
1FB02 2BF02
Control side
• Operating range 0.8 ... 1.25 × Us 0.8 ... 1.1 × Us
8 • Power consumption at Us W 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.2 0.75 0.75 1.2 1.2 1.2
• Release voltage % of Us ≥ 10 ≥ 25
• Max. permissible conductor - AC m 300 300 300 300 300 15 7 7 350
length (min. conductor cross-sec- - DC m 2000
tion: 0.75 mm2)
• Permissible residual current mA 2 2 2 4 2 0.4 0.35 0.35 4
of the electronic circuit (for 0 signal)
• Switching times at Us - ON-delay ms < 8
- OFF-delay ms < 10
• Function display yellow LED
Load side
Rated currents2)
• Conventional thermal current Ith A 6
• Rated operating currents Ie acc. to utilization categories (DIN VDE 0660)
(3TX7 002-1CB00: AC-15, Ie = 2 A)
- AC-15 - at 24 V A 3
- at 110 V A 3
- at 230 V A 3
- DC-13 - at 24 V A 1.0
- at 110 V A 0.2
- at 230 V A 0.1
• Operating current
with resistive load to DIN VDE 0435 (relay standard) and DIN VDE 0660
- AC-12 - at 24 V A 6
- at 110 V A 6
- at 230 V A 6
- DC-12 - at 24 V A 6
- at 110 V A 0.2
- at 230 V A 0.2
• Operating voltage - AC/DC V 24 ... 250
• Min. contact load for 3TX7 00.-...02 mA AC/DC 1 V, 0.1
• Mechanical endurance Oper. 20 × 106
cycles
• Electrical endurance at Ie Oper. 1 × 105
cycles
• Operating frequency Oper. 5000
cycles
1/h
• Contact material for 3TX7 00.-...02 Ag/Ni 0.15 hard gold-plated
• Power limit hard gold plating for 3TX7 00.-...02
- Voltage V 30
- Current mA 20
Note: If inductive loads are connected in parallel, the service life

of the relay connectors can be increased.
1) No safe isolation for 3TX7 00.-1FB02
2) Capacitive loads can result in micro-welding on the contacts
8/72 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Relay connectors
Type 3TX7 004/3TX7 005

General data
Safe isolation between the coil and the contacts acc. to AC V up to 300
DIN VDE 0106 Part 101
Enclosures IP30
fuse-links, operational class gL/gG
• Screw connections (for 3TX7 004):
- solid mm2 1 × (0.25 ... 4)
- finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
- terminal screws M3
Control side
• Operating range at DC 17 ... 40 V –
at Us = AC/DC 24 V 0.7 ... 1.25 × Us
at Us = AC/DC 110 and 230 V 0.8 ... 1.1 × Us
• Power consumption at Us approx. 0.5 W/channel; 3TX7 00.-...05: 1 W at DC/6 VA at AC
• Permissible residual current of the electronics (for 0 signal)
- Width 6.2 mm
- Us = 24 V mA 2
- Us > 24 V
- From 12.5 mm width
mA 0.5
mA 2.5
8
Exceptions: 3TX700.-1LH00, mA 1.5
3TX700.-1BF05 mA 5 (Us = AC 230 V)
mA 0.5 (Us = AC 230 V)
• Switching times at Us - ON-delay ms < 8
- OFF-delay ms < 15
Type 3TX7 004/3TX7 005 -1.F00 -1.B.. 1.H0. -1BF05

-2ME02 -2MB02
-2MF02
Max. permissible conductor length
(min. conductor cross-section: 0.75 mm2)
• AC m 40 400 on request 350
• DC m 2000 2000 on request 2000
Type 3TX7 00.-1A/1B-/1C/-1H/1G 3TX7 00.-.L/.M

Load side
Rated operating currents Ie1)
• Conventional thermal current Ith A 6 6
• Rated operating current Ie
according to utilization categories (DIN VDE 0660)
- AC-15 - at 24 V A 3 2
- at 110 V A 3 2
- at 230 V A 3 2
- DC-13 - at 24 V A 1 1
- at 110 V A 0.2 0.2
- at 230 V A 0.1 0.1
• Operating current with resistive load to DIN VDE 0435 (relay standard)
and DIN VDE 0660
- AC-12 - at 24 V A 6 6
- at 110 V A 6 6
- at 230 V A 6 6
- DC-12 - at 24 V A 6 6
- at 110 V A 0.3 0.3
- at 230 V A 0.2 0.2
• Power limit/hard gold plating - Voltage V 30 30
- Current mA 20 20
• Operating voltage AC/DC V 17 ... 250 17 ... 250
• Endurance - mechanical Operating cycles 20 × 106 20 x 106
- electrical (at Ie) Operating cycles 1 × 106 0.5 x 106
• Operating frequency Operating cycles 5000 5000
1/h
Note: If inductive loads are connected in parallel, the service life

of the relay connectors can be increased.
1) Capacitive loads can result in micro-welding on the contacts
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/73
Relay connectors

AC and DC operation • for snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail
Rated control Contacts Width DT Screw-type PS* Weight DT Spring-loaded PS* Weight
supply voltage Version connection per PU terminal per PU
Us approx. approx.
AC 50/60 Hz S W mm Order No. kg Order No. kg

3TX7 002 and 3TX7 003 relay connectors
Output interfaces
AC/DC 24 V 1 – 11.5 } 3TX7 002-1AB00 1 unit 0.032 } 3TX7 003-1AB00 1 unit 0.030
AC/DC 24 V 1 (hard – } 3TX7 002-1AB02 1 unit 0.032 –
gold-
plated)
AC/DC 24 V – 1 17.5 } 3TX7 002-1BB00 1 unit 0.043 } 3TX7 003-1BB00 1 unit 0.038
AC/DC 230 V – 1 } 3TX7 002-1BF00 1 unit 0.044 A 3TX7 003-1BF00 1 unit 0.039
AC/DC 24 V 21) – 22.5 } 3TX7 002-1CB00 1 unit 0.055 } 3TX7 003-1CB00 1 unit 0.050
AC/DC 24 V – 2 (hard } 3TX7 002-1FB02 1 unit 0.055 –
gold-
3TX7 002 plated)1)
Input interfaces
AC/DC 24 V 1 – 11.5 } 3TX7 002-2AB00 1 unit 0.032 A 3TX7 003-2AB00 1 unit 0.030
AC/DC 110 V 1 – } 3TX7 002-2AE00 1 unit 0.032 –
AC/DC 230 V1) 1 – 11.5 } 3TX7 002-2AF00 1 unit 0.033 A 3TX7 003-2AF00 1 unit 0.031
AC/DC 230 V1) 1 – } 3TX7 002-2AF05 1 unit 0.038 –
AC/DC 230 V – 1 (hard 17.5 } 3TX7 002-2BF02 1 unit 0.043 –
gold-
plated)2)
8 3TX7 002
Note:
For coil voltages which are not listed, see DC power supplies
SITOP power e.g. 6EP1 331-2BA10 and 6EP1 731-2BA00 in
"Transformers and power supplies".
1) The same potential must be applied to 2 NO/2 CO relays.

2) Observe max. permissible conductor length, see Technical specifications.

Relay connectors
Rated control Contacts Chan- Manual- Width DT Screw-type PS* Weight DT Spring-loaded PS* Weight
supply volt- Version nel 0-auto- connection per PU terminal per PU
age Us matic approx. approx.
switch
for test-
ing pur-
poses
AC 50/60 Hz S W mm Order No. kg Order No. kg
Relay connectors 3TX7 004 and 3TX7 005
Output interfaces
AC/DC 24 V – 1 1 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-1LB00 1 unit 0.033 } 3TX7 005-1LB00 1 unit 0.029
AC/DC 230 V – 1 1 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-1LF00 1 unit 0.035 } 3TX7 005-1LF00 1 unit 0.030
AC/DC 230 V – 1 1 without 12.51) } 3TX7 004-1BF05 1 unit 0.057 A 3TX7 005-1BF05 1 unit 0.053
DC 17/40 V – 1 1 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-1LH00 1 unit 0.033 A 3TX7 005-1LH00 1 unit 0.029
AC/DC 24 V – 1 (hard 1 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-1LB02 1 unit 0.033 } 3TX7 005-1LB02 1 unit 0.028
gold-
plated)
AC/DC 24 V 1 – 1 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-1MB00 1 unit 0.038 } 3TX7 005-1MB00 1 unit 0.034
AC/DC 230 V 1 – 1 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-1MF00 1 unit 0.037 } 3TX7 005-1MF00 1 unit 0.034
3TX7 004- AC/DC 24 V – 1 1 with 12.5 } 3TX7 004-1BB10 1 unit 0.052 C 3TX7 005-1BB10 1 unit 0.048
1LB0.
Input interfaces
AC/DC 24 V 1 (hard – 1 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-2MB02 1 unit 0.037 C 3TX7 005-2MB02 1 unit 0.034
gold-
plated)
AC/DC 110 V 1 (hard – 1 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-2ME02 1 unit 0.037 C 3TX7 005-2ME02 1 unit 0.031
gold-
plated)
AC/DC 230 V 1 (hard –
gold-
1 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-2MF02 1 unit 0.038 C 3TX7 005-2MF02 1 unit 0.034 8
plated)
3TX7 005-
2MB02
Note:
For replacement products, see interfaces with 3RS18 industrial
enclosure or other 3TX70 products.
1) For long conductors.

Relay connectors
■ Accessories
For interface Version DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.
Type kg
Connecting comb
3TX7 004 24 terminals, blue, width 6.2 mm } 3TX7 004-8AA00 1 unit 0.017
Connecting lead
3TX7 002, 3TX7 003, 3TX7 004, 24 terminals with supply cable, blue A 3TX7 004-8BA00 1 unit 0.050
3TX7 005

Plug-in relay connectors
■ Benefits ■ Overview
The wire is fed in and screwed down from the front. This results Coupling elements are used to connect signals to and from a
in faster wiring time and wiring errors are prevented. PLC. The plug-in relays enable the relay to be replaced at the
end of its service life without the need for any changes in the wir-
ing.
For easy bridging of the signals, each terminal can be jumpered
using an external connecting comb.
Type 3TX7 01.-1
General data
Safe isolation between the coil and the contacts acc. to DIN VDE 0106 V up to AC 300 V
Part 101
Enclosures IP40
Fuse-links, operational class gL/gG
• Screw connections
- solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
- terminal screw M3
Type 3TX7 01.-1.M 3TX7 01.-1.B 3TX7 01.-1.E/F

8
Control side
• Operating range 0.9 ... 1.1 × Us 0.7 ... 1.25 × Us 0.8 ... 1.1 × Us
• Power consumption at Us W 0.5
• Release voltage % of Us 10
• Max. permissible conductor - AC m 7
length (min. conductor cross-sec- - DC m 2000
tion: 0.75 mm)
• Permissible residual current mA 2 2 0.4
• Operating times at Us - ON-delay ms < 5 <7 <8
- OFF-delay ms < 5 <7 < 13
• Protection circuit
- DC flywheel diode +
reverse voltage protec-
tion
- AC Varistor
Type 3TX7 01.-1

Load side
Rated currents1)
• Rated operating currents Ie
- AC-15 - at 24 V A 3
- at 110 V A 3
- at 230 V A 3
- DC-13 - at 24 V A 1
- at 110 V A 0.2
- at 230 V A 0.1
• Operating voltage AC/DC V 24 ... 250
• Min. contact load
- standard contact AC/DC 17 V, 5 mA at 1 ppm fault2)
- hard gold-plated contacts AC/DC 5 V, 1 mA for 1 ppm fault2)
• Mechanical endurance Operat- 20
ing
cycles
• Electrical endurance for Ie Operat- 100000
acc. to AC-15 ing
cycles
• Operating frequency Operat- 5000
ing
cycles
1/h
Note: If inductive loads are connected in parallel, the service life 1) Capacitive loads can result in micro-weldings on the contacts
of the relay connectors can be increased. 2) 1 ppm = one fault per one million operating cycles.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/77

Plug-in relay connectors

Rated control supply Contacts DT Screw connection PS* Weight
voltage Us per PU
approx.
S W Order No. kg
Plug-in interface, complete with relay
DC 24 V 1 – A 3TX7 014-1AM00 1 unit 0.035
DC 24 V – 1 A 3TX7 014-1BM00 1 unit 0.035
AC/DC 24 V – 1 A 3TX7 014-1BB00 1 unit 0.035
AC/DC 115 V – 1 A 3TX7 014-1BE00 1 unit 0.045
AC/DC 230 V – 1 A 3TX7 014-1BF00 1 unit 0.045
3TX7014-1BM00
Plug-in base interface, complete with relay and hard gold-plating1)
DC 24 V – 1 hard gold-plated A 3TX7 014-1BM02 1 unit on
request
AC/DC 24 V – 1 hard gold-plated A 3TX7 014-1BB02 1 unit 0.035
AC/DC 115 V – 1 hard gold-plated A 3TX7 014-1BE02 1 unit on
request
AC/DC 230 V – 1 hard gold-plated A 3TX7 014-1BF02 1 unit on
request
8 Coil voltage Used for DT Order No. PS* Weight

per PU
approx.
kg
Individual relay modules2), 1 changeover contact
DC 24 V Complete unit DC 24 V A 3TX7 014-7BQ00 1 unit on
request
DC 24 V Complete unit, DC 24 V, hard gold-plated A 3TX7 014-7BQ02 1 unit on
request
DC 24 V Complete unit AC/DC 24 V A 3TX7 014-7BM00 1 unit 0.035
DC 24 V Complete unit, DC 24 V, hard gold-plated A 3TX7 014-7BM02 1 unit 0.035
DC 24 V Complete unit AC/DC 115 V and 230 V A 3TX7 014-7BP00 1 unit on
request
DC 24 V Complete unit AC/DC 115 V and 230 V, hard gold-plated A 3TX7 014-7BP02 1 unit on
request
Connecting comb 16-pole, blue
for jumpering the same potentials, 16-pole, 6 A current-carrying capacity A 3TX7 014-7AA00 1 unit on
request
Note:
Start of delivery of the socket interfaces with screw-type connec-
tion, expected at the beginning of 2004, units with spring-loaded
terminals at the end of 2004.
1) The variants with hard gold-plated contacts with high contact reliability
(also for low currents) are especially suitable for electronic inputs of pro-
grammable logic controllers.
2) The order number is not printed on the relays.

Semiconductor couplers
■ Area of application ■ Functions

AC and DC operation Surge suppression
DIN VDE 0110 Part 1, DIN VDE 0435, DIN VDE 0660 and In the case of optocouplers, the contact element is a semicon-
EN 50 005 optocoupler: DIN VDE 0884, DIN VDE 0411 Part 500, ductor. These are not subject to wear; so welding is not possible.
IEC 61131-2 (programmable logic controllers).
With semiconductors, the switching current is not dependent on
In the coupling elements in double-decker format, the connec- the inductance of the load, i.e. the switching current for a DC-13
tions are arranged on two levels; the units are extremely com- load is the same as that for an inductive DC-12 load. This means
pact. Connection method: screw-type connection or spring- that coupling elements with a semiconductor output are particu-
loaded terminal. For test purposes, versions are available with larly suitable for inductive loads such as solenoid valves. It is not
manual 0 automatic switches. relevant to specify the number of operating cycles because this
does not affect the service life of the semiconductor provided it
The input and output coupling elements differ with regard to the is not overheated.
positioning of the terminals and the LEDs. For equipment identi-
fication purposes, each coupling element has a blank legend
plate.
In accordance with the technical specifications of electronic sys-
tems, the coupling elements have a lower power consumption.
■ Design
Note on mounting
Snap-on mounting is possible on horizontal and vertical rails. In
the case of vertical rails and closely mounted units, the maxi-
mum permissible ambient temperature Tu = 40 °C. Any service
position is possible.
If the coupling elements are operated continuously 24 hours per
day (100% ON time) at the maximum permissible rated control
8
supply voltage and the maximum permissible ambient tempera-
ture, it is recommended that no similar equipment or other units
that generate heat are placed directly adjoining the coupling el-
ements because this can reduce the service life of the couplers.
To provide shock-hazard protection in the case of modules of 6.2 mm
A clearance of > 10 mm to the right and left of the coupling ele- width (e.g. 3TX7 004-3AB04) with an opening in the casing, the single
ment reduces the risk of a premature failure under these condi- module or the last module in a row must be fitted with a cover plate.
tions of application.
Optocouplers switch using semiconductors. These are not sub-
ject to wear; welding is not possible.
The 6.2 mm wide optocouplers have an opening in the right-
hand side of the casing. They can, like relay connectors, be
mounted side-by-side without gaps.
Peripheral
devices Electronic control Actuators
AC 110 V AC 110 V
AC 230 V DC 24 V DC 24 V AC 230 V
Output
Input
M
Pushbuttons Interface Interface Motor
Position switches NSB00186
contactor
Connecting a lead to the spring-loaded terminals
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/79

Type 3TX7 002/3TX7 003
General data
Derating diagram for Rated insulation voltage Ui V 300
3TX7 002-3AB01 (pollution degree 3)
Load current depending on ambient Optoelectronic coupling element for V ... 300
temperature Tu safe isolation acc. to
I (A) DIN VDE 0660 Part 101
Continuous Conductor cross-sections
current per solid mm2 1 × (0.25 ... 4)
channel Separate finely stranded with or without end mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
1,5
1.5
sleeve
between terminal screws M3
2 modules
with 5 mm Permissible ambient temperature
1 during operation °C –25 ... +60
clearance each and
1W power loss each during storage °C –40 ... +80
0,5
0.5
NSB00187
20 40 60 Tu (°C)
Type 3TX7 002- 3AB00 3AB01 4AB00 4AG00

Control side
Operating range V DC 17 ... 30 DC 11 ... 30 AC/DC 17 ... 30 AC 88 ... 264
8 Control side current input •

•
•
at DC 17 V
at DC 24 V
at DC 30 V
mA
mA
mA
< 18
< 20
< 22
<5
<7
< 8.5
–
–
–
–
–
–
• at AC/DC 17 V mA – – < 10 –
• at AC/DC 24 V mA – – < 14 –
• at AC/DC 30 V mA – – < 18 –
• at AC 88 V mA – – – <9
• at AC 230 V mA – – – < 24
• at AC 264 V mA – – – < 28
Release voltage V >5 >8 >5 > 40
Operating times
• ON-delay at DC 17 V ms < 10 < 0.1 – –
at DC 24 V ms < 10 < 0.1 – –
at DC 30 V ms < 10 < 0.1 – –
at AC/DC 17 V ms – – <1 –
at AC/DC 24 V ms – – <1 –
at AC/DC 30 V ms – – <1 –
at AC 88 V ms – – – < 18
at AC 230 V ms – – – < 20
at AC 264 V ms – – – < 22
• OFF-delay at DC 17 V ms < 10 < 0.1 < 18 –
at DC 24 V ms < 10 < 0.1 < 25 –
at DC 30 V ms < 10 < 0.1 < 30 –
at AC/DC 17 V ms – – < 18 –
at AC/DC 24 V ms – – < 25 –
at AC/DC 30 V ms – – < 30 –
at AC 88 V ms – – – < 10
at AC 230 V ms – – – < 20
at AC 264 V ms – – – < 25
Function display yellow LED yellow LED yellow LED yellow LED
Max. permissible conductor length AC m – – 1000 140
(min. conductor cross-section: DC m 2000 2000 2000 –
0.75 mm2)
Load side
• Rated operating current Ie A 1.8 1.5 0.1 0.1
(see derating
diagram)
• Short-time loading capacity A 20 4 1 1
ms 20 0.2 20 20
• Contacts 1 NO, Triac 1 NO, transistor 1 NO, transistor 1 NO, transistor
• Switching voltage1) effective AC 50/60 Hz V 48 ... 264
(working range) DC V ≤ 60 ≤ 30 ≤ 60
• Minimum load current mA 60 – – –
• Voltage drop (conducting) V ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1.1 ≤ 1.7 ≤ 0.3
• Leakage current of the electronics (for 0 signal) mA < 5 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.001
• Operating frequency at Ie Hz 1 1 5 5
1) Observe minimum operating voltage for 3TX7 002-3AB00.
8/80 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Type 3TX7 004/3TX7 005

General data
Safe isolation acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 V ... 300
• during operation °C – 25 ... + 60
• during storage °C – 40 ... + 80
• Screw connections (for 3TX7 004):
- solid mm2 1 × (0.25 ... 4)
- finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
- terminal screws M3
Type 3TX7 004-/ 3AB04/ 3AC.4 3AC03 3PB54 4PG24

3TX7 005- 4AB04
Control side
• Operating range V 11 ... 30 DC 11 ... 30 DC 11 ... 30 DC 11 ... 30 DC 110 ... 230
AC/DC
• Power consumption
- at DC 24 V W ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.25 ≤ 0.2 –
- at AC 230 V W – – – – ≤ 1.5
• Release voltage V 6 5 6 9 20
• Permissible residual current of the electronic circuit mA 2.3 2.6 1.5 1.5 0.4
(for 0 signal)
• Operating times
- ON-delay ms 2.5 0.3 10 0.3 1
8
- OFF-delay ms 8 4 10 0.3 6
• Function display yellow LED yellow LED yellow LED yellow LED yellow LED
• Max. permissible conductor length m 1700 2000 2000 2000 40
Load side
Operating voltage V ≤ 48 DC ≤ 30 DC 24 ... 250 V AC ≤ DC 30 V ≤ DC 30 V
Operating current A 0.5 5 2 1.5 0.1
• Short-time loading capacity
A 1.5 Short-circuit 100 Short-circuit 0.2
resistant1) resistant2)
ms 20 20 3
• Contacts 1 NO contact, 1 NO contact, 1 NO contact, 1 NO contact, 1 NO contact,
transistor transistor triac transistor transistor
• Minimum load current mA – 5003) 50 – –
• Voltage drop (conducting) V ≤1 ≤ 0.5 ≤ 1.6 ≤ 0.5 ≤ 1.5
• Leakage current for 0 signal mA < 0.1 < 0.1 <6 < 0.1 < 0.1
• Operating frequency for resistive load Hz 50 50 1 500 500
1) In the event of a short-circuit or overload, the semiconductor output
switches off. In order to operate the unit again, it must be temporarily dis-
connected from the power supply.
2) In the event of a short-circuit or overload, the current is limited by the semi-
conductor output.
3) If the current falls below the minimum load current, the built-in semicon-
ductor detects an open-circuit in the load circuit. The control must be tem-
porarily switched off for resetting.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/81

Type 3TX7 004-/ 3P.74 3PB41 3RB43 4PB24

3TX7 005-
Control side
• Operating range V 110 ... 230 AC/DC 11 ... 30 DC 18 ... 30 DC 11 ... 30 DC
• Power consumption
- at DC 24 V W – ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.3 ≤ 0.2
- at AC 230 V W ≤ 1.5 – – –
• Release voltage V 25 5 12 6
• Permissible residual current of the electronic circuit (for 0 signal) mA 1 1.5 4 1.2
• Operating times
- ON-delay ms 1.5 4 0.2 0.2
- OFF-delay ms 75 6 10 1
• Function display yellow LED yellow LED yellow LED yellow LED
• Max. permissible conductor length m 40 2000 2000 2000
Load side
Operating voltage V ≤ DC 30 ≤ DC 200 AC 24 ... 250 ≤ DC 30
Operating current A 3 0.75 0.5 0.1
• Short-time loading capacity
A Short-circuit 3 0.8 0.2
resistant1)
ms 2 3 3
• Contacts 1 NO contact, 1 NO contact, 1 NO contact, 1 NO contact,
transistor transistor triac transistor
• Minimum load current mA – – 10 –
• Voltage drop (conducting) V ≤ 0.5 ≤2 ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1.5
• Leakage current of the electronics (for 0 signal) mA ≤ 0.1 ≤ 0.1 ≤1 ≤ 0.1
8 • Operating frequency for resistive load Hz 10
1) In the event of a short-circuit or overload, the current is limited by the semi-
50 50 500
conductor output.
8/82 Siemens LV 10 · 2004


AC and DC operation • for snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail
Rated control Contacts Width DT Screw connection PS* Weight DT Spring-loaded PS* Weight
supply voltage per PU terminal per PU
Us approx. approx.
Version
AC 50/60 Hz mm Order No. kg Order No. kg
3TX7 002 semiconductor interfaces
Output interfaces
DC 24 V 1 triac – 12.5 } 3TX7 002-3AB00 1 unit 0.033 –
1 triac – 11.5 } 3TX7 002-3AB01 1 unit 0.035 –
Input interfaces
AC/DC 24 V 1 transistor – 12.5 } 3TX7 002-4AB00 1 unit 0.031 –
AC 110 ... 240 V 1 transistor – 12.5 } 3TX7 002-4AG00 1 unit 0.035 –
3TX7 002
Control Operating Oper- Manual-0- Width DT Screw connection PS* Weight DT Spring-loaded PS* Weight
voltage ating auto- per PU terminal per PU
current matic approx. approx.
switch for
testing
purposes
AC 50/60 Hz A mm Order No. kg Order No. kg
3TX7 004 and 3TX7 005 semiconductor interfaces
Output interfaces
DC 24 V ≤ 48 V DC 0.5 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-3AB04 1 unit 0.034 } 3TX7 005-3AB04 1 unit 0.031
8
DC 24 V ≤ DC 30 V 1.5 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-3PB54 1 unit 0.029 } 3TX7 005-3PB54 1 unit 0.024
DC 24 V ≤ DC 30 V 3 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-3PB74 1 unit 0.032 A 3TX7 005-3PB74 1 unit 0.027
AC/DC ≤ DC 30 V 3 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-3PG74 1 unit 0.033 A 3TX7 005-3PG74 1 unit 0.027
110 ... 230 V
DC 24 V ≤ DC 30 V 5 without 12.5 } 3TX7 004-3AC04 1 unit 0.056 } 3TX7 005-3AC04 1 unit 0.047
DC 24 V ≤ DC 30 V 5 with 12.5 C 3TX7 004-3AC14 1 unit 0.053 C 3TX7 005-3AC14 1 unit 0.051
DC 24 V ≤ 200 V DC 0.75 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-3PB41 1 unit 0.035 A 3TX7 005-3PB41 1 unit 0.032
3TX7 004-3AB04
with cover plate DC 24 V 24 ... 250 V 0.5 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-3RB43 1 unit 0.041 A 3TX7 005-3RB43 1 unit 0.032
AC
DC 24 V 24 ... 250 V 2 without 12.5 } 3TX7 004-3AC03 1 unit 0.060 C 3TX7 005-3AC03 1 unit 0.056
AC
Input interfaces
AC/DC ≤ DC 30 V 0.1 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-4PG24 1 unit 0.034 } 3TX7 005-4PG24 1 unit 0.031
110 ... 230 V
DC 24 V ≤ DC 30 V 0.1 without 6.2 } 3TX7 004-4PB24 1 unit 0.034 A 3TX7 005-4PB24 1 unit 0.031
DC 24 V1) ≤ 48 V DC 0.5 without 6.2 C 3TX7 004-4AB04 1 unit 0.034 C 3TX7 005-4AB04 1 unit 0.034
Note:
For replacement products, see interfaces with 3RS18 industrial
enclosure or other 3TX70 products.
1) Discontinued products: will no longer be manufactured from the beginning
of 2004.

For interface Version DT Order No. PS* Weight

per PU
approx.
Type kg
Connecting comb
3TX7 004 24 terminals, blue, width 6.2 mm } 3TX7 004-8AA00 1 unit 0.017
Connecting lead
3TX7 002, 3TX7 003, 3TX7 004, 24 terminals with supply, blue A 3TX7 004-8BA00 1 unit 0.050
3TX7 005
Cover plate
3TX7 004-3AB04, 3TX7 004-4AB04, RAL 7035, light gray } 3TX7 004-8CE00 1 unit 0.016
3TX7 005-3AB04, 3TX7 005-4AB04,
3TX7 005-4PB24

Coupling Relays in Industrial Enclosure
Relay connectors

The new 3 RS18 coupling relays are couplers in the well-proven Typical applications are found wherever electronically optimized
standard 22.5 mm time-delay relay enclosure. The series com- contacts are required and equipment with a wide voltage range
prises relays with 1, 2 and 3 changeover contacts with screw- is implemented.
type and spring-loaded terminals for combined voltages and
wide voltage ranges.
■ Benefits
• Wide voltage range: one product for all voltages
• The industrial enclosure supports the same connection meth-
ods as the time-delay relay including spring-loaded terminals,
2 wires can be clamped
• Versions with electronically optimized outputs (gold-plated)
• Up to 3 changeover contacts with only 22.5 mm width.
Type 3RS18..-....1 3RS18..-....0
General data
Rated insulation voltage Ui pollution degree 3 V 300
Safe isolation acc. to DIN VDE 0106 between the coil and the contacts V 300
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
• Enclosure IP20
• Cover IP40
• during operation
• during storage
°C –25 ... +60
°C –40 ... +80 8
Shock resistance 15/11
Vibration resistance 10 ... 55/0.35
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4
Tests according to basic specification
• Screw connection
- Solid mm2 1 × (0.5 ... 4)/2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)
- AWG conductors, mm2 2 × (20 ... 14)
solid or stranded
- Terminal screw M 3.5
- Corresponding opening tool Standard screwdriver, size 2 or Pozidrive 2
- Solid mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1)
- Finely stranded without end mm2 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
sleeve
solid or stranded
- Corresponding opening tool Screwdriver with 3 mm blade or
8WA2 807 opening tool
Control side
• Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
• Rated power
- max. DC W 1
- max. AC VA 8
• Mains buffering
- depends on version ms 5 ... 100
• Max. permissible conductor length 2/3 changeover contact 1 changeover contact
- 330 pF/m AC m 200 100
- min. cross-section 0.75 mm2 DC m 1500 2000
• Permissible OFF-state current mA 2
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/85

Coupling Relays in Industrial Enclosure
Relay connectors
Type 3RS18..-....1 3RS18..-....0

Load side
• Rated operating currents Ie
- AC-15
- at 24 V A 3
- at 110 V A 3
- at 230 V A 3
- at 400 V A 3
- DC-13
- at 24 V A 1
- at 110 V A 0.2
- at 230 V A 0.1
• Operating current for resistive load
- AC-12
- at 24 V A 5
- at 115 V A 5
- at 230 V A 5
- at 400 V A 5
- DC-12
- at 24 V A 5
- at 115 V A 0.2
- at 230 V A 0.2
• Operating voltage
- max. AC V 400
- max. DC V 250
• Contact material AgNi 0.15 hard gold-plated AgSnO2
• Min. contact load
- Standard contact – DC 17 V, 5 mA for 1ppm fault
- Hard gold-plated contacts DC 5 V, 1 mA for 1ppm fault –
8 • Endurance
- Mechanical operating cycles
- Electrical (at Ie) operating cycles
20 × 106
1 × 106
• Operating times
- max. ON-delay at Us ms 8 (for 3RS18 00-..W0. < 30)
- max. OFF-delay at Us ms 30 (for 3RS18 00-..W0. < 150)
• Operating frequency Oper. 5000
cycles/
h
Short-circuit protection A 4
Weld-free fuse, operational class gL/gG at Ik ≥ 1 kA

Rated control supply Contacts DT Screw connection PS* Weight DT Spring-loaded terminal PS* Weight
voltage Us Version per PU per PU
approx. approx.
50/60 Hz W Order No. kg Order No. kg
Coupling relays in 22.5 mm industrial enclosure
Wide-range voltage
24 ... 240 V AC/DC 2 B 3RS18 00-1BW00 1 unit 0.145 B 3RS18 00-2BW00 1 unit 0.128
3 B 3RS18 00-1HW00 1 unit 0.170 B 3RS18 00-2HW00 1 unit 0.147
31) B 3RS18 00-1HW01 1 unit 0.170 B 3RS18 00-2HW01 1 unit 0.147
Combination voltage
AC/DC 24 V and 1 B 3RS18 00-1AQ00 1 unit 0.116 B 3RS18 00-2AQ00 1 unit 0.104
AC 110 ... 120 V 2 B 3RS18 00-1BQ00 1 unit 0.142 B 3RS18 00-2BQ00 1 unit 0.123
3 B 3RS18 00-1HQ00 1 unit 0.173 B 3RS18 00-2HQ00 1 unit 0.147
31) B 3RS18 00-1HQ01 1 unit 0.173 B 3RS18 00-2HQ01 1 unit 0.147
AC/DC 24 V and 1 B 3RS18 00-1AP00 1 unit 0.116 B 3RS18 00-2AP00 1 unit 0.104
AC 220 ... 240 V 2 B 3RS18 00-1BP00 1 unit 0.142 B 3RS18 00-2BP00 1 unit 0.123
3 B 3RS18 00-1HP00 1 unit 0.170 B 3RS18 00-2HP00 1 unit 0.147
31) B 3RS18 00-1HP01 1 unit 0.170 B 3RS18 00-2HP01 1 unit 0.147
1) Hard gold-plated.

Plug-In Relays
Relay connectors
■ Design ■ Functions
Plug-in relay coupling elements can be ordered complete or as In accordance with the technical specifications of electronic sys-
single modules. tems, the coupling elements have a lower power consumption.
In the versions equipped with LEDs, these indicate the switching
Mounting status. The LZX:PT/MT relay connectors have a test button. This
The relays are plugged into the socket and this is snapped onto can be used to force the relay connector into the tripped state
the 35 mm EN 50022 standard rail. and to lock it. This is indicated by a raised orange-colored lever.
Note: Surge suppression
For the plug-in relay coupling elements LZX of Series RT, the The 24 V DC relays LZX:RT and LZX:PT with LEDs can be sup-
spring element must be hung onto the standard rail from below plied with, all others without integral surge suppression (free-
and fixed in place. wheeling diode connected in parallel with A1/A2). The positive
supply voltage must be connected to coil terminal A1.
2
2 Logical disconnection
The terminals for the contacts and the terminals for the coil are
arranged on separate levels, e.g. above for contacts and below
for coil. Logical disconnection is not identical to safe isolation.
Safe isolation
For safe isolation, transfer of the voltage of one circuit to another
circuit is prevented to a suitable degree of safety (see DIN VDE
NSB0_01427
106, Part 101).
1
3 1
A fixing bracket can be ordered for the MT series that addition-
ally fixes the relay into a plug-in socket (under conditions of in-
creased mechanical stress). For the RT and PT series, a com-
8
bined fixing and ejection bracket is available which can be used
to remove the relay where access is difficult, for example, when
relays are mounted side-by-side.
They can be mounted as required.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/87

Plug-In Relays
Relay connectors
Relay type RT print relay, 8- and 11-pole, PT industrial relay, 8-, 11-, and 14-pole,
(12.7 mm) 1 CO/2 CO (22.5 mm) 2 CO/3 CO/4 CO
AC and DC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us1) V DC 24 AC 24 AC 115 AC 230 DC 24 AC 24 AC 115 AC 230
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 250 250
Pollution degree 3 3
Overvoltage category III III
Safe isolation between the coil and the ... 250 V (with socket LZX:RT78626) no
contacts acc. to DIN VDE 0106 no (for complete units)
Degree of protection relay/socket IP 67/IP 20 IP 50/IP 20
• during operation °C – 40 ... + 70 – 40 ... + 70 (+ 50 for base assembly)
• during storage °C – 40 ... + 80 – 40 ... + 80
• solid mm2 2 × 2.5 2 × 2.5
• finely stranded with or without end sleeve mm2 2 × 1.5 2 × 1.5
Control side
Operating range
• at 20 °C V 16.8 ... 52 18 ... 52 86.3 ... 127 172 ... 264 18 ... 40. 19.2 ... 39.6 92 ... 190 184 ... 380
Power consumption at Us 0.4 W 0.5 VA 0.75 VA 0.75 VA 0.5 W 1 VA 1 VA 1 VA
Release voltage V 2.4 7.2 34.5 69 3.6 7.2 34.5 69
Protection circuit Freewheel no no no Freewheel no no no
diode for diode in
complete LED
unit module
Max. permissible conductor length at > 2000 m 30 m (with LED), > 2000 m 500 m 200 m 50 m
8 Us2) (min. cross-section 0.75 mm2)
Load side
20 m (without LED)
Operating voltage
• AC/DC V 24 ... 250 24 ... 250
Rated currents3)
Conventional thermal current Ith A 16/8 (1 CO/2 CO) 12/10/6 (2 CO/3 CO/4 CO)
Rated operating current Ie AC-15 A 6/3 5/5/4
according to utilization categories
(DIN VDE 0660)
Rated operating current Ie DC-13 A 2 at 24 V 5 at 24 V
according to utilization categories A 0.27 at 230 V 0.5 at 230 V
(DIN VDE 0660)
Short-circuit protection A 10 6
Ik ≥ 1 kA acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
fuse links, operational class
gL/gZ DIAZED
Shock resistance g/ms 10/11 9/11
Vibration resistance
floating sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
30 Hz... 150 Hz
• Opening the normally-closed contacts g 5 approx. 7
along the critical axis
• Closing the normally-open contacts g > 20 > 20
Min. contact load standard 17 V, 10 mA; hard gold-plated 17 V/ standard 17 V, 10 mA; hard gold-plated 20 mV/
(reliability: 1ppm) 0.1 mA 1 mA
Mechanical endurance Oper. 30 × 106 10 × 106 10 × 106
cycles
Electrical endurance Oper. 1 × 105 1 × 105 1 × 105

(resistive load at 250 V AC) cycles
Operating frequency 7200 operating cycles/h 6/600 operating cycles/min (with/without load)
Make-time typi- 7 15
cally/ms
Break-time typi- 3 10
cally/ms
Bounce time typi- 2 5
cally/ms
Contact material AgNi 90/10 AgNi 90/10
1) AC voltages, 50 Hz; for 60 Hz operation, the lower response value must be
increased by 10 %; the power loss will be reduced slightly.
2) The max. conductor length depends on the conductor capacity and the
cable installation. It can be increased by means of parallel load on A1/A2.
3) Capacitive loads can result in micro-weldings on the contacts.
8/88 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Plug-In Relays
Relay connectors
Relay type MT industrial relay, 11-pole

(35.5 mm) 3 COs
AC and DC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us1) V DC 24 V AC 24 V AC 115 V AC 230
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 250 250
Pollution degree 3 3
Overvoltage category III III
Safe isolation between the coils and the con- no no
tacts to DIN VDE 0106
Degree of protection relay/socket IP 50/IP 20
• during operation °C – 45 ... + 60 – 45 ... + 50 – 45 ... + 50 – 45 ... + 50
• during storage °C – 45 ... + 80 – 45 ... + 80 – 45 ... + 80 – 45 ... + 80
• solid mm2 2 × 2.5
• finely stranded with or without end sleeve mm2 2 × 1.5
Control side
Operating range
• at 20 °C V 18 ... 38 19.2 ... 38 92 ... 137 184 ... 264
Power consumption at Us 1.2 W 2.3 VA 2.3 VA 2.3 VA
Release voltage V 2.4 9.6 46 92
Protection circuit no
Max. permissible conductor length at Us2) > 2000 m on request on request 80 m
(min. cross-section: 0.75 mm2)
Load side
Operating voltage
• AC/DC V AC/DC 24 ... 250
Rated currents3)
Conventional thermal current Ith A 10
8
Rated operating current Ie DC-13 A 2 at 24 V
according to utilization categories A 0.27 at 230 V
(DIN VDE 0660)
Rated operating currentIe AC-15 A 5 at 24 V and 230 V
according to utilization categories
(DIN VDE 0660)
Short-circuit protection A 10
Ik ≥ 1 kA acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
fuse links,
operational class gL/gZ DIAZED
Vibration resistance
floating sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
30 Hz... 150 Hz
• Opening the normally-closed contacts along the g 2
critical axis
• Closing the normally-open contacts g > 20
Min. contact load DC 12 V/10 mA
(reliability: 1ppm)
Mechanical endurance Oper. 20 × 106
cycles
Electrical endurance Oper. 4 × 105
(resistive load at 250 V AC) cycles
Operating frequency Oper. 6000
cycles/h
Make-time typi- 12
cally/ms
Break-time typi- 5
cally/ms
Bounce time typi- 4
cally/ms
Contact material AgNi 90/10
1) AC voltages, 50 Hz; for 60 Hz operation, the lower response value must be
increased by 10 %; the power loss will reduce slightly.
2) The max. conductor length depends on the conductor capacity and the
cable installation. It can be increased by means of parallel load on A1/A2.
3) Capacitive loads can result in micro-weldings on the contacts.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/89

Plug-In Relays
Relay connectors

Version Rated control sup- Contacts Width DT Order No. PS* Weight
ply voltage Us per PU
approx.
mm kg
Complete units, 11- and 14-pole, PT series
Complete unit with socket DC 24 V 3 COs 27 A LZX:PT3A5L24 1 unit 0.099
for snap-on mounting on 35 mm AC 24 V A LZX:PT3A5R24 1 unit 0.099
standard mounting rail consisting AC 115 V A LZX:PT3A5S15 1 unit 0.099
of: AC 230 V A LZX:PT3A5T30 1 unit 0.099
plug-in relay, standard socket, LED DC 24 V 4 COs 27 A LZX:PT5A5L24 1 unit 0.099
module (DC-24-V-LED with free-
AC 24 V A LZX:PT5A5R24 1 unit 0.100
wheel diode, AC without freewheel
AC 115 V A LZX:PT5A5S15 1 unit 0.099
diode), fixing/ejection bracket and
AC 230 V A LZX:PT5A5T30 1 unit 0.099
label
Complete unit with socket (logical DC 24 V 3 COs 27 A LZX:PT3B5L24 1 unit 0.106
LZX:PT3A5L24 isolation) AC 24 V A LZX:PT3B5R24 1 unit 0.107
for snap-on mounting on 35 mm AC 115 V A LZX:PT3B5S15 1 unit 0.105
standard mounting rail comprising: AC 230 V A LZX:PT3B5T30 1 unit 0.106
plug-in relay with safe isolation, LED DC 24 V 4 COs 27 A LZX:PT5B5L24 1 unit 0.112
module (DC-24-V-LED with free- AC 24 V A LZX:PT5B5R24 1 unit 0.112
AC 115 V A LZX:PT5B5S15 1 unit 0.112
AC 230 V A LZX:PT5B5T30 1 unit 0.112
label
Complete units, 8-pole, 5 mm pinning, RT series
Complete unit with socket DC 24 V 1 CO 15.5 A LZX:RT3A4L24 1 unit 0.057
for snap-on mounting onto 35 mm DC 24 V 2 COs A LZX:RT4A4L24 1 unit 0.057
standard mounting rail comprising: AC 230 V 1 CO A LZX:RT3A4T30 1 unit 0.057
print relay, standard socket, LED AC 230 V 2 COs A LZX:RT4A4T30 1 unit 0.060
module (DC-24-V-LED with free- AC 24 V 1 CO 15.5 A LZX:RT3A4R24 1 unit 0.060
8 wheel diode, AC without freewheel
label
AC 24 V
AC 115 V
2 COs
1 CO
A
A
LZX:RT4A4R24
LZX:RT3A4S15
1 unit
1 unit
0.060
0.060
AC 115 V 2 COs A LZX:RT4A4S15 1 unit 0.060
Complete unit with socket (logical DC 24 V 1 CO 15.5 A LZX:RT3B4L24 1 unit 0.065
isolation) for snap-on mounting DC 24 V 2 COs A LZX:RT4B4L24 1 unit 0.065
onto 35 mm standard mounting rail AC 230 V 1 CO A LZX:RT3B4T30 1 unit 0.064
comprising: AC 230 V 2 COs A LZX:RT4B4T30 1 unit 0.064
LZX:RT4B4AT30 print relay with safe isolation, LED AC 24 V 1 CO 15.5 A LZX:RT3B4R24 1 unit 0.064
AC 24 V 2 COs A LZX:RT4B4R24 1 unit 0.064
AC 115 V 1 CO A LZX:RT3B4S15 1 unit 0.064
AC 115 V 2 COs A LZX:RT4B4S15 1 unit 0.065
label
Complete units, 5-pole, 3.2 mm pinning, RY series
Complete unit with socket (logical DC 24 V 1 CO 15.5 A LZX:RY1A4L24 1 unit 0.048
isolation)
for snap-on mounting on 35 mm
standard mounting rail comprising:
print relay, standard socket, LED
label
LZX:RY1A4L24
Note:
Logical isolation: the terminals for the contacts and the terminals
for the coil are arranged on separate levels, e.g. above for con-
tacts and below for coil. Logical isolation is not identical to safe
isolation.
Safe isolation: safe isolation prevents voltage of one circuit af-
fecting another circuit with sufficient protection (DIN VDE 106
Part 101).

Plug-In Relays
Relay connectors
Version Rated control supply Contacts Width DT Order No. PS* Weight
voltage Us Change- per PU
over approx.
contacts
mm kg
Print relays, 8- and 11-pole, 5 mm pinning, RT series
Individual modules for customer assembly
Print relay with hard DC 24 V 1 CO 12.7 A LZX:RT315024 1 unit 0.016
gold plating AC 24 V 1 CO 12.7 } LZX:RT315524 1 unit 0.013
AC 230 V 1 CO 12.7 D LZX:RT315730 1 unit 0.015
Print relay DC 24 V 1 CO 12.7 } LZX:RT314024 1 unit 0.016
DC 24 V 2 COs 12.7 } LZX:RT424024 1 unit 0.015
LZX:RT314024 AC 24 V 1 CO 12.7 } LZX:RT314524 1 unit 0.007
AC 24 V 2 COs 12.7 } LZX:RT424524 1 unit 0.014
AC 115 V 1 CO 12.7 A LZX:RT314615 1 unit 0.013
AC 230 V 1 CO 12.7 } LZX:RT314730 1 unit 0.003
Socket for mounting onto – 1/2 COs 15.5 } LZX:RT78625 1 unit 0.041
standard mounting rail
Socket for mounting onto – 1/2 COs 15.5 } LZX:RT78626 1 unit 0.046
standard mounting rail with safe isolation
LZX:RT78625
8
LZX:RT78626
LED module
red with freewheel DC 24 V – 15.5 } LZX:RPML0024 1 unit 0.003
diode
without freewheel AC/DC 24 V – } LZX:RPML0524 1 unit 0.003
LZX:RPML0024 diode
AC/DC 110 ... 230 V – } LZX:RPML0730 1 unit 0.003
green with freewheel DC 24 V – 15.5 } LZX:RPMG0024 1 unit 0.003
diode
LZX:PT16016 without freewheel AC 24 ... 60 V – A LZX:RPMG0524 1 unit 0.003
diode
AC 110 ... 230 V – } LZX:RPMG0730 1 unit 0.003
Fixing/ejection bracket – – 15.5 } LZX:RT16016 10 units 0.020
Label – – } LZX:RY16040 20 units 0.040
RC element AC 24 ... 48 V – A LZX:RPMU0548 1 unit 0.004
AC 110 ... 230 V – } LZX:RPMU0730 1 unit 0.003
Freewheel diode DC 6 ... 230 V – } LZX:RPMT00A0 1 unit 0.002
with connection to A1
Print relays, 5-pole, RY series
Print relay DC 24 V 1 CO 10.7 A LZX:RY213024 1 unit 0.009
Label on unit:
RY213024, RY613024
or JS24N-K
Socket for mounting onto – 1 CO 15.5 A LZX:RY78626 1 unit 0.035
Fixing/ejection bracket – – A LZX:RY16016 10 units 0.020
Note:

Plug-In Relays
Relay connectors
Version Rated control supply Con- Width DT Order No. PS* Weight
voltage Us tacts per PU
approx.
Change- mm kg
over
contact
Industrial relays, 8-, 11-, and 14-pole, PT series
Mini industrial relay DC 24 V 2 22.5 } LZX:PT270024 1 unit 0.030
with test bracket and DC 24 V 3 } LZX:PT370024 1 unit 0.031
mechanical contact posi- DC 24 V 4 } LZX:PT570024 1 unit 0.034
tion indicator, without AC 24 V 2 A LZX:PT270524 1 unit 0.030
LED1) AC 24 V 3 A LZX:PT370524 1 unit 0.031
LZX:PT570024 AC 24 V 4 } LZX:PT570524 1 unit 0.031
AC 115 V 2 D LZX:PT270615 1 unit 0.029
AC 115 V 3 A LZX:PT370615 1 unit 0.030
AC 115 V 4 } LZX:PT570615 1 unit 0.030
AC 230 V 2 } LZX:PT270730 1 unit 0.029
AC 230 V 3 } LZX:PT370730 1 unit 0.030
AC 230 V 4 } LZX:PT570730 1 unit 0.030
with hard gold-plating DC 24 V 4 22.5 } LZX:PT580024 1 unit 0.031
AC 24 V 4 } LZX:PT580524 1 unit 0.031
AC 230 V 4 } LZX:PT580730 1 unit 0.031
LZX:PT78702 Relay without test bracket DC 24 V 4 22.5 } LZX:PT520024 1 unit 0.031
AC 24 V 4 A LZX:PT520524 1 unit 0.032
AC 230 V 4 A LZX:PT520730 1 unit 0.031
Socket for mounting onto – 2 27 } LZX:PT78702 1 unit 0.051
standard mounting rail – 3 } LZX:PT78703 1 unit 0.062
– 4 } LZX:PT78704 1 unit 0.063
8 LED module
red with freewheel DC 24 V – 15.5 } LZX:RPML0024 1 unit 0.003
diode
without freewheel AC/DC 24 V – } LZX:RPML0524 1 unit 0.003
LZX:RPML0024 diode
AC/DC 110 ... 230 V – } LZX:RPML0730 1 unit 0.003
green with freewheel DC 24 V – 15.5 } LZX:RPMG0024 1 unit 0.003
diode
LZX:PT16016 without freewheel AC 24 ... 60 V – A LZX:RPMG0524 1 unit 0.003
diode
AC/DC 110 ... 230 V – } LZX:RPMG0730 1 unit 0.003
Fixing/ejection bracket – – 15.5 } LZX:PT16016 10 units 0.020
Label – – } LZX:PT16040 20 units 0.040
AC 110 ... 230 V – } LZX:RPMU0730 1 unit 0.003
Industrial relays, 11-pole, MT series
Industrial relay with test bracket
without LED DC 24 V 3 35.5 A LZX:MT321024 1 unit 0.088
with LED DC 24 V 3 } LZX:MT323024 1 unit 0.089
without LED AC 24 V 3 A LZX:MT326024 1 unit 0.089
with LED AC 24 V 3 A LZX:MT328024 1 unit 0.089
LZX:MT326024 with LED AC 115 V 3 A LZX:MT328115 1 unit 0.093
with LED AC 230 V 3 A LZX:MT328230 1 unit 0.089
With test bracket, with DC 24 V 3 35.5 LZX:MT3230C4 1 unit 0.090
LED, with freewheel diode
Socket for mounting onto – – 38 } LZX:MT78750 1 unit 0.063
Fixing bracket – – 38 } LZX:MT28800 1 unit 0.001
LZX:MT78750
Note:
1) The test bracket is designed to be non-latching. If the test bracket is
pressed further until 90° has been reached, two small lugs break off and
the test bracket can be latched in position.

Plug-In Relays
Relay connectors
■ Accessories
Version DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
for PT relays
Logical socket
with logical arrangement of the contacts
2 changeover contacts A LZX:PT78802 1 unit 0.063
LZX:PT78802
Base with top slide, pinning 3.5 mm
2 different conductor cross-sections can be connected
Note:
Accessories, LED modules LZX: RPM und
fixing/ejection bracket LZX:PT16016 can
not be used with these bases!
LZX:PT78604
Version Rated control supply Width DT Order No. PS* Weight

voltage Us per PU
approx. 8
mm kg
for PT and RT relays
LED module
red with freewheel diode DC 24 V 15.5 } LZX:RPML0024 1 unit 0.003
without freewheel diode AC/DC 24 V } LZX:RPML0524 1 unit 0.003
AC/DC 110 ... 230 V } LZX:RPML0730 1 unit 0.003
LZX:RPML0024
green with freewheel diode DC 24 V 15.5 } LZX:RPMG0024 1 unit 0.003
without freewheel diode AC 24 ... 60 V A LZX:RPMG0524 1 unit 0.003
AC/DC 110 ... 230 V } LZX:RPMG0730 1 unit 0.003
Fixing/ejection bracket
LZX:PT16016
for RT range – 15.5 } LZX:RT16016 10 units 0.020
for PT range } LZX:PT16016
Label
for RT range – – } LZX:RY16040 20 units 0.040
for PT range LZX:PT16040
AC 110 ... 230 V – } LZX:RPMU0730 1 unit 0.003
for RY relays
Base
3.2 mm pinning, 1 changeover A LZX:RY78626 1 unit 0.035
contact
Fixing/ejection bracket A LZX:RY16016 10 units 0.020

Plug-In Relays
Relay connectors
LZX:RT3 LZX:RT4
1-pole 2-pole
A1 12 11 14 A1 12 11 14
A2 22 21 24 A2 22 21 24
NSB00247 NSB00248
LZX:PT270 LZX:PT370 LZX:PT570

2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
(1) (4) (1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3) (4)
12 42 12 22 32 12 22 32 42
14 44 14 24 34 14 24 34 44
(5) (8) (4) (5) (6) (5) (6) (7) (8)
NSB00250
NSB01011
NSB00249
11(9) 41(12) 11(7) 21(8) 31(9) 11(9) 21(10) 31(11) 41(12)
8 (13)A1 A2(14) (13)A1 A2(14) (13)A1 A2(14)
LZX:MT32
3-pole
(5) (6) (7)

22 21 24
(4)12 (8)32
(3)14 (9)34
NSB00251
(2) (1) (11) (10)

A1 11 31 A2
Values in brackets: socket designations.

Without brackets: contact/coil designations.
8/94 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Power Relays
With screw and tab connectors

Design Because they are hum-free they are suitable for use in house-
hold appliances and distribution boards in office and residential
The 3TG10 contactors with 4 main contacts are available with areas.
6.3 ... 0.8 mm screw-type connections or tab connectors. The They can also be used for applications where there is little space
designs with screw-type connections are climate-proof and fin- such as air conditioners, heating systems, pumps, and fans, i.e.
ger-safe in accordance with DIN VDE 0106 Part 100. for simple electrical controls.
The 3TG10 contactors are small, their width is 36 mm. AC and DC operation
EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Surge suppression
The 3TG10 contactors have an integrated protective circuit
against opening surges.
Overload and short-circuit protection
The 3UA7 overload relay can be used for overload protection.
This applies to mounting onto contactors and installation as a
single unit.
Information about short-circuit protection by means of contac-
tors can be found in the Technical specifications.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/95

Power Relays
Type 3TG10
General data
Endurance
• mechanical Op. cycles 3 million
• electrical
- AC-1 at Ie Op. cycles 0.1 million
- AC-3 at Ie Op. cycles 0.4 million
Rated impulse voltage strength Uimp kV 4
Safe isolation between the coil and the contacts acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 V up to 300
Permissible ambient temperature during operation1) °C – 25 ... + 55
Degree of protection acc. to DIN EN 60947-1 and EN 60529 IP00, drive system IP20
Power input of the solenoids AC operation 45 ... 450 Hz VA 4.4
(for cold coil and 1.0 × Us) p.f. 0.9 (hum-free)
DC operation W 4
Coil voltage tolerance 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
Operating times (break-time = OFF-delay + arcing time)
• ON-delay
- Activation - DC operation NO ms 11 ... 50
- AC operation NO ms 10 ... 50
- Deactivation - DC operation NC ms 21 ... 39
- AC operation NC ms 20 ... 30
• OFF-delay
- Activation - DC operation NC ms 5 ... 45
- AC operation NC ms 5 ... 45
- Deactivation - DC operation NO ms 19 ... 35
8 • Arcing time
- AC operation NO ms
ms
20 ... 30
10 ... 15
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 5.1/5 and 3.5/10
• Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 7.9/5 and 5.2/10
Operating frequency z acc. to AC-1 1/h 1000
in operating cycles/hour acc. to AC-2 1/h 500
rated operation acc. to AC-3 1/h 1000
No-load operating frequency 1/h 10000
Short-circuit protection
Fuse-links
Operational class gL/gG NH type 3NA, DIAZED type 5SB
NEOZED type 5SE acc. to DIN EN 60947-4-1/ • Type of coordination "1" A 25
(VDE 0660 Part 102) • Type of coordination "2" A 10
Miniature circuit-breaker C characteristic A 10
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-1, switching resistive loads
Rated operating current Ie up to 400 V at 55 °C1) A 20 for screw-type connection, 16 for tab connector
Rated power Ue of three-phase loads p.f. = 1, 230/220 V
• for screw-type connection kW 7.5 (13 at 400 V)
• for tab connector kW 6 (10 at 400 V)
Minimum conductor cross-section with Ie mm2 2.5
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3
Rated operating currents Ie up to 400 V A 8.4
Rated power of motors with slip ring or squirrel-cage rotor kW 4
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz and at 400 V
Utilization category AC-5a (permissible nominal impedance: ≥ 0.5 Ω)
switching of gas discharge lamps
• Per main conducting path 18 W2) 0.37 A4) 43
at 50 Hz/230 V 36 W2) 0.43 A4) 37
2
58 W ) 0.67 A4) 24
• Per main conducting path at 230 V, 18 W2) 2 × 0.11 A4) 2 × 81
lead-lag circuit 36 W2) 2 × 0.21 A4) 2 × 42
58 W2) 2 × 0.32 A4) 2 × 28
Switching of gas discharge lamps with compensation, electronic ballast
per main conducting path with 50 Hz at 230 V
• Shunt compensation 18 W2) 4.5 µF3) 0.11 A4) Units 15
36 W2) 4.5 µF3) 0.21 A4) Units 15
58 W2) 7.0 µF3) 0.32 A4) Units 10
• With electronic ballast (single lamp) 18 W2) 6.8 µF3) 0.10 A4) Units 39
36 W2) 6.8 µF3) 0.18 A4) Units 39
58 W2) 10.0 µF3) 0.27 A4) Units 26
• With electronic ballast (two lamps) 18 W2) 10.0 µF3) 0.18 A4) Units 2 × 26
36 W2) 10.0 µF3) 0.35 A4) Units 2 × 26
58 W2) 22.0 µF3) 0.52 A4) Units 2 × 12
Utilization category AC-5b per main conducting path with 50 Hz at 230 V kW 1.6
1) If the three main conducting paths carry a load of 20 A, the following
applies if I > 10 A for the fourth conducting path: permissible ambient tem-
perature 40 °C.
2) Rated power per lamp.
3) Capacitor capacity.
8/96 Siemens LV 10 · 2004 4) Rated operating current per lamp.
Power Relays
Load ratings with DC

Utilization category DC-1, switching of resistive loads (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
• 1 series-connected conducting up to 24 V A 16
path 60 V A 6
110 V A 2
220 V/240 V A 0.8
paths 60 V A 16
110 V A 6
220 V/240 V A 1.6
paths 60 V A 18
110 V A 16
220 V/240 V A 6
paths 60 V A 20
110 V A 20
220 V/240 V A 20
Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5,
shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 1 ms)
path 60 V A 0.5
110 V A 0.15
220 V/240 V A –
paths 60 V A 5
110 V A 0.35
220 V/240 V A –
paths 60 V A 16
110 V A 10
• 4 series-connected conducting
220 V/240 V
up to 24 V
A
A
1.75
18 8
paths 60 V A 16
110 V A 10
220 V/240 V A 2
Conductor cross-section for version
with screw-type connection M3
• Finely stranded with end sleeve (DIN 46228 Form A/D/C) mm2 2 × (0.75 ... 2.5)
• Solid 2
mm 2 × (1 ... 2.5)
with tab connector
• Finely stranded 6.3 mm push-on sleeve acc. to DIN 46245/46247
- 6.3 ... 1 mm2 mm2 0.5 ... 1
- 6.3 ... 2.5 mm2 mm2 1 ... 2.5
CSA and UL rated data (screw-type connection)
Continuous current
• Enclosed A 20
• Open A 20
Maximum horsepower ratings
(CSA and UL approved values)
Rated power of three-phase motors with 60 Hz
• 1-phase at 115 V 0.5
200 V 1
230 V 1.5
460 V –
575 V –
600 V –
• 3-phase at 115 V –
200 V 3
230 V 3
460 V 5
575 V 5
600 V 5
Short-circuit protection for overload, see overload relay and

protective devices.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/97

Power Relays

Rated data Main Rated control DT Order No. PS* Weight
Utilization category contacts supply voltage Us per PU
AC-1 AC-2 and AC-3 approx.
Switching of resistive loads
at
55 °C
Operating Power of three- Operating Power of three- Version
current Ie phase loads at current Ie phase loads at
at 400 V 50 Hz, at 400 V1) 50 Hz,
400 V 400 V
A kW A kW NO NC kg
with screw-type connections, 4-pole
for screw and snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail • hum-free
AC operation
20 13 8.4 4 4 – 230 V, 45 ... 450 Hz } 3TG10 10-0AL2 1 unit 0.156
110 V, 45 ... 450 Hz A 3TG10 10-0AG2 1 unit 0.158
24 V, 45 ... 450 Hz } 3TG10 10-0AC2 1 unit 0.157
3 1 230 V, 45 ... 450 Hz } 3TG10 01-0AL2 1 unit 0.157
110 V, 45 ... 450 Hz A 3TG10 01-0AG2 1 unit 0.158
24 V, 45 ... 450 Hz } 3TG10 01-0AC2 1 unit 0.157
DC operation
20 13 8.4 4 4 – 24 V DC } 3TG10 10-0BB4 1 unit 0.157
3 1 24 V DC } 3TG10 01-0BB4 1 unit 0.157
3TG10..-0
with 6.3 × 0.8 mm tab connectors, 4-pole
for screw and snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail • hum-free
8 AC operation
16 10 8.4 4 4 – 230 V, 45 ... 450 Hz } 3TG10 10-1AL2 1 unit 0.145
110 V, 45 ... 450 Hz D 3TG10 10-1AG2 1 unit 0.185
24 V, 45 ... 450 Hz A 3TG10 10-1AC2 1 unit 0.145
3 1 230 V, 45 ... 450 Hz } 3TG10 01-1AL2 1 unit 0.144
110 V, 45 ... 450 Hz D 3TG10 01-1AG2 1 unit 0.146
24 V, 45 ... 450 Hz D 3TG10 01-1AC2 1 unit 0.147
DC operation
16 10 8.4 4 4 – 24 V DC A 3TG10 10-1BB4 1 unit 0.146
3 1 24 V DC D 3TG10 01-1BB4 1 unit 0.146
3TG10..-1
1) The parallel connections can be reduced by one pole. The rated operating
currents apply to each pole. The parallel connections are insulated.
■ Accessories
For contactor max. rated operating currents max. conductor DT Order No. PS* Weight
Ie/AC-1 (at 55 °C) of the contactors cross-sections per PU
approx.
Type A mm2 kg
Parallel connections (neutral jumpers)
3-pole, without connection terminal1)2)
3TG10 16 – } 3RT19 16-4BA31 1 unit 0.003
neutral jumpers can be reduced by one
pole
3-pole, with connection terminal1)3)
3TG10 40 25 } 3RT19 16-4BB31 1 unit 0.015
4-pole, with connection terminal1)4)
3TG10 50 25 C 3RT19 16-4BB41 1 unit 0.015
1) The parallel connections can be reduced by one pole. The rated operating
currents apply to each pole. The parallel connections are insulated.
2) Replacement for 3TX44 90-2C.
3) Replacement for 3TX44 90-2A.
4) Replacement for 3TX44 90-2B.

Power Relays
Position of the terminals Internal circuit diagrams
3TG10 10 3TG10 01 3TG10 10 3TG10 01
1 NO contact 1 NC contact 1 NO contact 1 NC contact
Ident. no.: 10E 01E
A1(+) 1 3 5 13 A1(+) 1 3 5 21
NSB00661
NSB00662
A1 A1
A2( ) 2 4 6 14 A2( ) 2 4 6 22
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 21
2 4 6 14 2 4 6 22
NSB00717
NSB00718
A2 A2
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/99

Converters/Isolation Amplifiers
Interface converters/isolation amplifiers

In automation and control engineering it will always be neces- Converters are used in analog signal processing for
sary to work with analog signals. The interfaces for analog sig- • Galvanic isolation
nals that have established themselves as the standard are 0 to
10 V and 0/4 to 20 mA. • Conversion of normalized and non-normalized signals
• Matching of gain and impedances
Interface converters perform the coupling function for analog
signals on both the input side and the output side. They are in- • Conversion to a frequency for processing by a digital input
dispensable when processing analog values with electronic • Overvoltage and EMC protection
controls. Under harsh industrial conditions in particular, it is often • Short-circuit protection of the outputs
necessary to transmit analog signals over long distances. This
means that galvanic isolation is essential due to the different • Potential multiplication.
supply systems. The resistance of the wiring causes potential
differences and losses which must be prevented. Electromag-
netic disturbance and overvoltages can affect the signals on the Application example:
input side in particular or even destroy the analog modules. All Interface converter in analog signal evaluation
terminals of the 3RS17 interface converters are safe up to a volt- Sensor/
age of DC 30 V and protected against switching poles. Short-cir- analog value sensor
0...10 V 0...10 V
Electronic control
0...10 V 0...10 V
cuit protection is an especially important function for the outputs. 0/4...20 mA 0/4...20 mA 0/4...20 mA 0/4...20 mA
U, I 0...10 kHz U, I
Input Output
U, I, F
The devices are EMC-tested according to U, I,
Converter Converter Actuator with
NSB01311b
• EN 61000-6-4 (basic technical standard for emitted interfer- 3RS17 3RS17 analog input
ence),
• EN 61000-6-2 (basic technical standard for immunity to inter- 3RS17 25 manual/automatic converter
ference).
For special applications in which analog signals have to be sim-
The analog signals comply with ulated, or during plant commissioning when the actual process
• IEC 60381-1/2. value is not yet available, the 3RS17 25 devices feature an ad-
8 justable potentiometer for entering setpoints manually and a
manual/automatic switch.
The potentiometer for the 3RS17 25 devices is used to simulate
analog output signals when the changeover switch is set to
"Manual" and the control supply voltage is applied, without the
need for an analog input signal; and the scale ranges from
0 % to 100 %.
Example:
When it is set for an output of 4 mA to 20 mA, the 0 % scale value
on the potentiometer represents an output current of 4 mA and
the 100 % scale value represents an output current of 20 mA.
In the "Auto" switch position, the output signal follows the input
signal proportionally regardless of the potentiometer setting.
8/100 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Type 3RS17 24 V AC/DC 24 ... 240 V AC/DC
General data
Operating range of the supply voltage
• DC 0.7 ... 1.25 × Un 0.7 ... 1.1 × Un
• AC 0.8 ... 1.2 × Un 0.8 ... 1.1 × Un
Rated power (own requirements) W typically 0.3 typically 0.75
Electrical isolation input/output Active disconn.: 1500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min 4000 V, 50 Hz, 1 min
Passive disconn.: 500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min
Rated insulation voltage Pollution degree 2 V 50 300
Overvoltage category III to DIN VDE 0110
Ambient temperature during operation °C – 25 ... + 60
Screw-type connections
• Conductor cross-section
- solid mm2 1 × (0.25 ... 4)
• Terminal screws M3
Spring-loaded terminal
• Solid or finely stranded mm2 1 × (0.08 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 × (0.25 ... 1.5)
Degree of protection Enclosure acc. to EN 60529 IP30
Terminals acc. to EN 60529 IP20
Mounting onto standard rail EN 50022 mm 35
Vibration resistance IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 10-55/0,35
Shock resistance IEC 60068-2-27
Input
g/ms 15/11
8
Impedance Voltage inputs kΩ 330
Current inputs, active Ω 100
Input voltage max. Voltage inputs V AC/DC 30
Current inputs, active V AC/DC 30
Response current Current inputs, passive µA 100/250 (6.2 mm width)
Voltage drop Current inputs, passive V 2.7 at 20 mA
Output
Impedance Voltage output, 0 ... 10 V Ω 55
Output load, max. • Current 0/4 ... 20 mA, active Ω 400
• Current 0 ... 20 mA, passive Ω 1000 at 20 mA, 400 at 20 mA (6.2 mm width)
• Frequency 2400
Output current, max. • Voltage output, 0 ... 10 V mA 21
for supply voltage • Frequency mA 10
Short-circuit current • Voltage output, 0 ... 10 V mA 40
• Current output, 0 ... 20 mA, passive mA corresponds to the input current
• Frequency mA 15
Protection of the outputs short-circuit resistant
Max. overvoltage at output V 30
Accuracy
Total errors at 23 °C • Active discon. Frequency % 0.1
U, I % 0.11)
Linearity error • Active discon. Frequency % 0.02
U, I % 0.02
Deviation through • Active discon- Frequency 0 ... 50 Hz: 7.5 mHz/K; 0 ... 100 Hz: 15 mHz/K; 0 ... 1 kHz: 0.15 Hz/K;
ambient temperature nector 0 ... 10 kHz: 1.5 Hz/K
U, I 0 ... 10 V: 1.5 mV/K; 0/4 ... 20 mA: 3 µA/K
• Passive discon- 6.2 mm width: 100 ppm/K of measured value
nector
12.5 mm width: with load < 600 Ω: < 50 ppm/K of measured value;
with load ≥ 600 Ω: < 175 ppm/K of measured value
Transmission error • Passive discon. % 0.1
Measured value load error %/Ω 0.06/100
Limit frequency at 3 dB • Active discon. Frequency Hz 30
U, I Hz 30
• Passive discon. Hz 50
Rise time (10 to 90 %) • Active discon. Frequency 10 + 1 period
U, I ms 10
Settling time • Active discon. Frequency 30 + 1 period
at 1 % accuracy U, I ms 30
Remaining ripple • Active discon. U, I mVeff < 5
• Passive discon. mVeff < 8
The accuracy refers to the measurement range end value if not otherwise stated.
1) For 3RS17 06: 0.1 % for selected output 4 ... 20 mA;
0.3 % for selected output 0 ... 20 mA or 0 ... 10 V.
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/101


Screw-type connection and spring-loaded terminals
All converters except the passive single interface converters have a yellow LED for indicating "Power on".
Input Output Width Supply voltage Electrical DT Screw-type PS* Weight DT Spring-loaded PS* Weight
isolation connection per PU terminal per PU
approx. approx.
mm V Order No. kg Order No. kg
Single interface converters, active
0 ... 10 V: 0 ... 10 V: 6,2 AC/DC 24 2 paths A 3RS17 00-1AD00 1 unit 0.053 A 3RS17 00-2AD00 1 unit 0.047
0 ... 10 V: 0...20 mA 6.2 AC/DC 24 2 paths A 3RS17 00-1CD00 1 unit 0.052 A 3RS17 00-2CD00 1 unit 0.047
0 ... 10 V: 4...20 mA 6.2 AC/DC 24 2 paths A 3RS17 00-1DD00 1 unit 0.052 A 3RS1 700-2DD00 1 unit 0.047
0...20 mA 0 ... 10 V: 6.2 AC/DC 24 2 paths A 3RS17 02-1AD00 1 unit 0.052 C 3RS17 02-2AD00 1 unit 0.047
0...20 mA 0...20 mA 6.2 AC/DC 24 2 paths A 3RS17 02-1CD00 1 unit 0.052 A 3RS17 02-2CD00 1 unit 0.045
0...20 mA 4...20 mA 6.2 AC/DC 24 2 paths A 3RS17 02-1DD00 1 unit 0.052 A 3RS17 02-2DD00 1 unit 0.048
4...20 mA 0 ... 10 V 6.2 AC/DC 24 2 paths A 3RS17 03-1AD00 1 unit 0.052 A 3RS17 03-2AD00 1 unit 0.047
4...20 mA 0...20 mA 6.2 AC/DC 24 2 paths A 3RS17 03-1CD00 1 unit 0.052 C 3RS17 03-2CD00 1 unit 0.049
4...20 mA 4...20 mA 6.2 AC/DC 24 2 paths A 3RS17 03-1DD00 1 unit 0.053 A 3RS17 03-2DD00 1 unit 0.047
Switchable multi-range converters, active
0...10 V 0...10 V 6.2 AC/DC 24 2 paths A 3RS17 05-1FD00 1 unit 0.053 A 3RS17 05-2FD00 1 unit 0.048
0...20 mA 0...20 mA 17.5 AC/DC 24 ... 240 3 paths A 3RS17 05-1FW00 1 unit 0.099 A 3RS17 05-2FW00 1 unit 0.092
4...20 mA, 4...20 mA,
switchable switchable
0...10 V 0...50 Hz 6.2 AC/DC 24 2 paths A 3RS17 05-1KD00 1 unit 0.053 C 3RS17 05-2KD00 1 unit 0.047
0...20 mA 0...100 Hz 17.5 AC/DC 24 ... 240 3 paths A 3RS17 05-1KW00 1 unit 0.099 A 3RS17 05-2KW00 1 unit 0.092
4...20 mA, 0...1 kHz
switchable 0...10 kHz
8 switchable
Switchable universal converters, active
0...60 mV 0...10 V 17.5 AC/DC 24 2 paths A 3RS17 06-1FD00 1 unit 0.082 A 3RS17 06-2FD00 1 unit 0.078
0...100 mV 0...20 mA 3 paths A 3RS17 06-1FE00 1 unit 0.082 A 3RS17 06-2FE00 1 unit 0.077
0...300 mV 4...20 mA,
0...500 mV switchable AC/DC 24 ... 240 3 paths A 3RS17 06-1FW00 1 unit 0.099 A 3RS17 06-2FW00 1 unit 0.094
0...1 V
0...2 V
0...5 V
0...10 V
0...20 V
2...10 V
0...5 mA
0...10 mA
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
+/-5 mA
+/-20 mA
switchable
Switchable multi-range converters, with manual/automatic
switch and setting potentiometer as manual analog signal
transmitter, active
0...10 V 0...10 V 17.5 AC/DC 24 2 paths A 3RS17 25-1FD00 1 unit 0.085 A 3RS17 25-2FD00 1 unit 0.078
0...20 mA 0...20 mA AC/DC 24 ... 240 3 paths A 3RS17 25-1FW00 1 unit 0.102 A 3RS17 25-2FW00 1 unit 0.095
4...20 mA, 4...20 mA,
switchable switchable
Input Output Width Number of Electrical DT Screw-type PS* Weight DT Spring-loaded PS* Weight
channels isolation connection per PU terminal per PU
approx. approx.
mm Order No. kg Order No. kg
Single interface converters, passive
0/4...20 mA 0/4 ... 20 6.2 1-channel 2 paths A 3RS17 20-1ET00 1 unit 0.049 A 3RS17 20-2ET00 1 unit 0.044
mA:
mA:
mA:

3RS17 00-..D..
3RS17 02-..D..
3RS17 03-..D. .
3RS17 05-..D.. 3RS17 06- . FD00
NSB01346
IN+ 2 U, I 3 OUT IN+ 1 6

OUT
4
0V
U, I
IN- 1 U, I, F 5 +/~ 2 U, I 5
24 V AC/DC IN- 0V
NSB01315a
7 8
+/~ 0V
24 V AC/DC
3RS17 06-.FE00 3RS17 0.-..W00

NSB01318a NSB01319a
IN+ 1 6
OUT+ IN+ 1 U, I, 6
OUT+
U, I U, I U, I F
IN- 2 5 OUT- IN- 2 5 OUT-
7 8 7 8
+/~
24 V AC/DC 24-240 V AC/DC
3RS17 25-.FD00
NSB01347
3RS17 25-.FW00
NSB01345 8
IN+ 1 6
OUT IN+ 1 6
OUT+
U, I U, I U, I
IN- 2 U, I 5 0V IN- 2 5 OUT-
7 8 7 8
+/~ 0V +/~
24 V AC/DC 24-240 V AC/DC
3RS17 20-.ET00 3RS17 21-.ET00

2 3
IN+ OUT+
I IN+ 1 3
OUT+
1 4
I
IN- I OUT-
NSB01344
IN- 2 I 4 OUT-
NSB01317a
3RS17 22-.ET00
1 3
IN+ OUT+
(1)
2
I 4
(1)
IN- I 7
OUT-
IN+ 5 OUT+
(2)
6 I 8
(2)
IN- I OUT-
NSB01316a
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/103

■ Further information Input voltage depending on the load at

Ia = 20 mA
Configuration The following diagram shows the input voltage UE as a function
Active interface converters of the load RB taking into account the voltage loss UV. If the load
is known, the y-axis shows the minimum voltage that has to be
Active interface converters provide maximum flexibility for the supplied by the current source in order to drive the maximum
application by the use of an external supply voltage. Configura- current of 20 mA over the passive isolator and load.
tion with active interface converters is extremely easy because
input and output resistances and voltage drops are compen- 7 E / V
N S B 0 1 3 1 3 a
sated by the auxiliary supply. They support complete voltage 2 2 ,7
isolation as well as conversion from one signal type to another or 2 0
amplification. The load of the measured value transmitter is neg- 1 5
ligible. 1 0
5
Passive interface converter 2 ,7
0
0 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 6 0 0 8 0 0 4 / O 1 0 0 0
Passive interface converters do not require an external supply 2 4 6 8 1 2 1 6 7
B
A / V 2 0
voltage. This advantage can only be used by current signals that
are converted 1:1. Amplification or conversion is not possible. Current carrying capacity of the outputs
The converters are used for complete galvanic isolation of cur- A maximum output resistance is specified for current signals.
rent signals and to protect the inputs and outputs. Passive isola- This resistance value specifies how large the input resistance of
tors do not operate reaction-free, any load on the output pro- the next device connected in series can be as a result of the
duces an equal load on the input. When the passive converter is power of the converter.
to be used, the output performance of the sensor and the input
resistance of the analog input must be analyzed. This technique For voltage signals, the maximum current that can be drawn
is being increasingly implemented in the case of pure current from the output is the decisive factor.
signals. 2-way isolation
Calculation guide for passive converter In the case of 2-way isolation, the input is galvanically isolated
8 Important: please note the following when using passive isola-
tors:
from the output. The "null potential" of the supply voltage is the
same as the reference potential for the analog output signal.
NSB01314a
When the output is open, the input becomes high-resistant and
the current-driving voltage of the measuring transducer UE must
be sufficient to drive the maximum current of 20 mA over the
U, I
IN OUT
passive isolator with a voltage loss of UV = 2.7 V and the load RB.
U, I, F
This means that: Vcc
UB ≥ UE = 2.7 V + 20 mA × RB 2-way isolation
3-way isolation
Distribution of the voltages in the case of passive isolators For the 3-path isolation, each circuit is electrically isolated from
the other circuits i.e. input, output, and supply voltage do not
7 B have a potential connection.
7 V = 2 ,7 V
NSB01343
1
1 U, I U, I,
7 E
4 B
IN F OUT
1 1 Vcc
3-way isolation
N S B 0 1 3 1 2 a
8/104 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Project planning aids
■ Dimension drawings
Time relay in 22.5 mm industrial enclosure,
temperature monitoring relay,
thermistor motor protection and
coupling relay in industrial enclosure
3RS10/3RS11 digital 3RP15, 3RS10/3RS11 analog
3RN10 62 3RN1 with 1 ... 2 sensor circuits, 3RS18
2 2 ,5 5 8 6
8 6
4 5 6 5 4 7 3 6
4 7 5 3 6
1 1 0 x 1 5
1 0 2
1 2 0
6 8
7 4
9 2
6 8
A
C
A
B
C
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 1 2 a N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 1 3 a
A C
A B C
3 R S 1 0 , 3 R S 1 1 , 3 R N 1 0 6 2 3 R N 1 0 0 0 3 R N 1 0 1 0 3 R N 1 0 1 1 , 3 R N 1 0 1 2
S ta n d a r d te r m in a l
3 R
3 R
S 1
P 1
8 0
5 1
0 -.A 3 R S 1 8 0 0 -.B 3 R
3 R
N 1
S 1
0 1 3 , 3
1 0 , 3 R
R N
S 1
1 0 2
1 1
2
8
3 R P 1 5 2 5 -.A 3 R S 1 .2 , 3 R S 1 .3
S p r in g - ty p e te r m in a l 8 4 ,3 1 0 7 ,6 3 R P 1 5 2 7 3 R S 1 8 0 0 -.H , 3 R P 1 5 0 5
S c r e w - ty p e te r m in a l 8 1 1 0 4 3 R P 1 5 4 0 -.A 3 R P 1 5 2 5 -.B , 3 R P 1 5 3
3 R P 1 5 5 5 3 R P 1 5 4 0 -.B , 3 R P 1 5 6 0
R e m o v e a b le te r m in a l 3 R P 1 5 7
S p r in g - ty p e te r m in a l 8 4 1 0 8 S ta n d a r d te r m in a l
S c r e w - ty p e te r m in a l 8 3 1 0 6
S p r in g - ty p e te r m in a l 8 1 ,6 9 1 1 0 1 ,6
S c r e w - ty p e te r m in a l 8 0 9 0 1 0 0
R e m o v e a b le te r m in a l
S p r in g - ty p e te r m in a l 8 4 9 4 1 0 3
S c r e w - ty p e te r m in a l 8 3 9 2 1 0 2
Time relay in the 45 mm SIRIUS Design

3RP20
S IE M E N S 5
6 0
4 0
5 5
5 7
5 0
8 0
2 0
5 1 0 0 %
N S B 0 _ 0 1 2 5 0 a
4 5 5 6 8 3 5
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/105


Time relays for mounting onto the front panel
7PV33 7PV41/7PV43
NSB01127a
1,5 to 4 max.
NSB01128a
48
4 5 6
3 7
2 8
48
1 9
10
5,5 64 48
70,4 14,5
48
Control panel thickness 1 to 3,5 mm Panel cutout 17 80
85
Panel cutout
+0,6
0
45
0,3
45
Frame for panel +0,6
mounting 45 0
Positioning screw
45 0,3
Accessories: LZX socket: MR78750 for Accessories:

7PV33; 7PV4 7PX9921 socket with rear connection
47 20,5 7
N S B 0 0 2 8 2 a
1 ,5
47
47
8
1 0 0 °
6 2
3 2 ,3
2 4 ,2
NSB01124a
33
3 8 4 9 ,3
2 6

3RT19 16-2E, -2F, -2G, -2L ... 3RT19 26-2E, -2F, -2G ...
Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks
38
38
NSB00985
46
46
25
NSB00986
5 9 75
45
5 12 73
for size S00 contactors and auxiliary contactors 33
for size S0 to S3 contactors and auxiliary contactors
3RT19 16-2C ... 3RT19 26-2C ...

Solid-state time-delay blocks with ON-delay
45 41
6 4 50
38
NSB00987
66
40
45 38
for mounting onto the front of contactors for size S00

NSB00988
for mounting at the top or bottom of the contactors for sizes

S0 to S3
8/106 Siemens LV 10 · 2004


3RT19 16-2D ... solid-state time-delay blocks, OFF-delay 3RT19 26-2D ...
45 41
6 11 4 50
38
16
26
NSB00989
9 5 38
45
for mounting onto the front of size S00 contactors
NSB00990
for mounting at the top or bottom of the contactors for sizes
S0 to S3
Monitoring relays
3UG30 3UG35 (without 3UG35 11) 3UG35 11
95
100
57
100
57
79
90
79
90
57
78
8
NSB00983
NSB00982
NSB01320
45 77 22,5 77 22,5 63
100 100 100
Sensors for level monitoring

3UG32 07-3A 3UG32 07-2A 3UG32 07-2B
Three-pole wire electrode Two-pole wire electrode Two-pole bow electrode
SW 22
NSB00991a
NSB00992
NSB00993a
0,5
5
SW 22 SW 22
15 15
6±1 7±1
15
15
15
15
500
500
5
5
3UG32 07-1B 3UG32 07-1C

Single-pole bow electrode Single-pole electrode, rugged design
SW 22
NSB00994
0,5
SW 22
15 15
6±1 7±1
15
15
40
PTFE-
50
insulation
NSB00995
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/107


Coupling relays with narrow type of construction
3TX7 002, 3TX7 003 coupling links in terminal block design
3TX7 00 .-1AB . ., 3TX7 002-3AB00, 3TX7 00 .-1BB00, 3TX7 00 .-1CB00,
3TX7 00 .-2A . . ., 3TX7 002-4A . . . 3TX7 00 .-1BF00, 3TX7 002-1BF02
3TX7 002-3AB01 3TX7 002-2BF02
NSB00270
NSB00284
NSB00268
NSB00269
60
M3 M3 M3 M3
11,5 12,5 17,5 22,5 62
3TX7 004, 3TX7 005 coupling links in two-tier design

Relay coupling links Relay coupling links Relay coupling links Relay coupling links
3TX7 00 .-1MB00, 3TX7 00 .-1AB10, 3TX7 00 .-1HB00 3TX7 00 .-1GB00
3TX7 00 .-1MF00, 3TX7 00 .-1BB00,
3TX7 00 .-1L . 0 ., 3TX7 00 .-1BB10,
3TX7 00 .-2M . . . 3TX7 00 .-1CB00,
3TX7 00 .-1BF05
Semiconductor coupling links Semiconductor coupling links

3TX7 00 .-3AB04, 3TX7 00 .-3AC04,
3TX7 00 .-4AB04, 3TX7 00 .-3AC14,
3TX7 00 .-3PB . ., 3TX7 00 .-3AC03
3TX7 00 .-3PG74,
3TX7 00 .-3RB43,
3TX7 00 .-4P . 24
8 NSB00274c
79 1)
80 2)
NSB00271
NSB00273
NSB00272
6,2 12,5 17,5

22,5 84
3TX7 014
3 0 °
8 9 ,5
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 2 8
6 ,2 9 2
1) Dimensions for 3TX7 004 coupling links (screw-type connections).

2) Dimensions for 3TX7 005 coupling links (spring-loaded terminals).
8/108 Siemens LV 10 · 2004


Plug-in relays
LZX:RT3/RT4 complete unit LZX:RT3/RT4 print relay LZX:RT78625 socket
for print relay
NSB00276
NSB00275a
NSB00277
15,7
Hold clip
2,6 12,7
75,5
3,8
Print relay 29
LED module
60 15,5 4,5 22,2

43
LZX:RT78626 socket
with safe isolation for print relay
NSB00278
75,5
15,5 4,5 22,2

8
61
LZX:PT570 industrial relay LZX:PT270 industrial relay LZX:PT78704 socket

for industrial relay
NSB00279
NSB01012
29
29
Relay
Hold clip
75
6
28 2,2 28 2,2
22,5 22,5
LED
module NSB00280
22,5 4,5 22,2

27 42,5
73,1
LZX:MT32 industrial relay LZX:MT78750 socket

for industrial relay
N S B 0 0 2 8 2 a
1 ,5
35,5
NSB00281
1 0 0 °
6 2
35,5 57
3 2 ,3
2 4 ,2
69
3 8 4 9 ,3
2 6
Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/109


Power relays
AC and DC operation Accessories for 3TG10
3TG10 ..-0.. 3TG10 ..-1.. Parallel connections, 4-pole,
with screw-type connections with tab connectors with 3RT19 16-4BB41 connection
terminal
3 6 3 6
NSB00788
1 8 5 5 5 1 8 5 5 6
45
M4
4 )
4 2 ,5
4 )
4 2 ,5
5 2
6 2
6 2
5 2
3 5
3 5
The parallel connections can be reduced
by one pole.
N S B 0 0 7 8 5 b N S B 0 0 7 8 6 b
3 ,5 x 4 ,7 3 ,5 x 4 ,7
Converter/isolation amplifiers
3RS17
6.2 mm type of construction 12.5 mm type of construction 17.5 mm type of construction
79 2)
80 3)
NSB00271
NSB00272
NSB01359
8 6,2 12,5 17,5 84 1)
1) Width for 3RS17 25 is approx. 90 mm. 4) Can be snapped onto 35 mm standard mounting rail.
2) Dimensions for screw-type connection.
3) Dimensions for spring-loaded terminal.
7
8/110 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

LV 10 2004 en 08

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LV 10 2004 en 08

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LV 10 2004 en 08

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIMIREL Time, Monitoring

and Coupling Relays and

8/2 Introduction Coupling relays and converters

Time relays Coupling relays with narrow type of

Monitoring relays for electrical

Other monitoring relays

3RP 7PV 3RS10 3RN 3UG

8/2 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

The advantages at a glance

3TX 3RS18 LZX 3TG10 3RS17

Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/3

■ Overview Locking/unlocking the removable terminal

SIMIREL offers everything one needs between the motor feeder

be ordered using the same order number:

• Easy screw-type and spring-loaded connection

• Proven terminal technology

8/4 Siemens LV 10 · 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.

Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/5

Type 3RP20 05 3RP15 05 3RP15 11 3RP15 40 3RP15 60 3RP15 74 3RP15 27

Type 7PV33 48 7PV41 48 7PV43 48

Mechanical endurance operating cycles 5 × 106 2 × 107

8/6 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/7

(dead interval, pulse time, and 15/18

The two-wire time relay is con- A1/A2

8/8 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage A1/A2 7 7 7 B1)

and instantaneous contact > 35ms

OFF-delay without auxiliary volt- > 200 ms 7

ON-delay and OFF-delay with aux- 7 7 C!1)

flashing, starting with interval 7 7 7 D

flashing, starting with interval A1/A2 7 7 D!

(pulse/interval 1:1) 15/18

passing make contact A1/A2 7 7 7 E

passing make contact and instan- 7 7 E!

Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/9

Function Function chart 3RP20 time 3RP15 time relay and

iary voltage and instantaneous > 35ms

pulse shaping with auxiliary volt- A1/A2 7 7 7 G1)

age (pulse generation at the output 35ms

additive ON-delay with auxiliary A1/A2 7 H1)

voltage and instantaneous contact t 1 t

star-delta function A1/A2 7 7 *∆

8/10 Siemens LV 10 · 2004

Time relay energized tY = star time 1 to 20 s

A./A2 Application example based on standard operation (operation 1)

tY 50 ms < t Idling < t Idling t Idling

The following applies to all operations:

Siemens LV 10 · 2004 8/11

AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V

3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A 3RP15 05-.A

AC/DC24V AC/DC24V AC/DC24V AC/DC24V

AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V

3RP15 27 3RP15 40-.A 3RP15 55 3RP15 05-.AW30

AC/DC24V AC/DC24V AC/DC24V AC/DC24V

AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V

3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B 3RP15 05-.B

AC/DC24V AC/DC24V AC/DC24V AC/DC24V

AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V AC100/127V